Rohde & Schwarz FSV K70, FSV 4, FSV 7, FSV 13, FSV 30, FSV 40 Vector Signal Analyzer Operating Manual
Below you will find brief information for Vector Signal Analyzer FSV K70, FSV 4, FSV 7, FSV 13, FSV 30, FSV 40. The Vector Signal Analyzer FSV-K70 option performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single-carrier signals. To perform the measurements it converts RF signals into the complex baseband. The instrument also uses the optional Digital Baseband interface (R&S FSV-B17 option) to analyze I/Q signals already delivered to the complex baseband.
advertisement
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Vector Signal Analysis
Operating Manual
(;ÚÙÜ2)
1176.7578.02 ─ 01
This manual describes the following R&S®FSV options:
● R&S FSV-K70 (1310.8455.02)
This manual describes the following R&S
®
FSV models with firmware version 2.0 and higher:
● R&S
® FSV 4 (1321.3008K04)
● R&S
®
FSV 7 (1321.3008K07)
● R&S
®
FSV 13 (1321.3008K13)
● R&S
® FSV 30 (1321.3008K30)
● R&S
®
FSV 40 (1321.3008K39)
● R&S
®
FSV 40 (1321.3008K40)
The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages. For information, see the "Open Source
Acknowledgement" on the user documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery).
Rohde & Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing.
© 2013 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S ® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S ® FSV is abbreviated as R&S
FSV.
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Contents
Contents
1 Preface....................................................................................................5
1.1
1.2
1.3
2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis......................................10
2.1
Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for I/Q Data.......................10
2.2
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing..................................................11
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors....................................................55
3 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis.............................72
3.1
3.2
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
3.3
3.4
4 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70...................................208
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
3
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Contents
4.14
4.15
5 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)...........................331
5.1
5.2
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC<n> Register............................................................334
5.3
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> Register..................................................334
5.4
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:EVM Register........................................335
5.5
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:PHASe Register....................................335
5.6
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:MAGnitude Register.............................336
5.7
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:CFRequency Register..........................336
5.8
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:IQRHO Register....................................336
5.9
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:FSK Register.........................................337
6 Support...............................................................................................338
6.1
6.2
6.3
7 Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations...............................................358
7.1
7.2
List of Commands..............................................................................374
Index....................................................................................................381
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
4
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Preface
Documentation Overview
1 Preface
When equipped with application firmware R&S
FSV-K70, the analyzer performs vector measurements on digitally modulated signals in the time domain. Based on the vector measurements, further evaluations, e.g. statistical evaluations, can be performed.
This document contains all information required for operation of an R&S
FSV equipped with Application Firmware R&S
FSV-K70. It describes the menus and remote-control commands for vector signal analysis, as well as some common measurements.
1.1 Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S
FSV is divided as follows:
● Quick Start Guide
● Operating Manuals for base unit and options
● Service Manual
● Online Help
● Release Notes
Quick Start Guide
This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the
CD. It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument.
Basic operations and basic measurements are described. Also a brief introduction to remote control is given. The manual includes general information (e.g. Safety Instructions) and the following chapters:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Appendix
Introduction, General information
Front and Rear Panel
Preparing for Use
Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options
Basic Operations
Basic Measurement Examples
Brief Introduction to Remote Control
LAN Interface
Operating Manuals
The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide. Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional (software) option.
The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the
R&S
FSV in general, and the "Spectrum" mode in particular. Furthermore, the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are descri-
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
5
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Preface
Documentation Overview bed here. The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples. In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide, a description of the basic analyzer commands and programming examples is given. Information on maintenance, instrument interfaces and error messages is also provided.
In the individual option manuals, the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail. For additional information on default settings and parameters, refer to the data sheets. Basic information on operating the R&S
FSV is not included in the option manuals.
The following Operating Manuals are available for the R&S
FSV:
● R&S FSV base unit; in addition:
– R&S
FSV-K9 Power Sensor Support
–
R&S
FSV-K14 Spectrogram Measurement
● R&S FSV-K7 Analog Demodulation and R&S FSV-K7S FM Stereo Measurements
● R&S FSV-K10 GSM/EDGE Measurement
● R&S FSV-K30 Noise Figure Measurement
● R&S FSV-K40 Phase Noise Measurement
● R&S FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual
R&S
FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started (First measurements)
● R&S FSV-K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis
● R&S FSV-K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis
● R&S FSV-K76/77 3GPP TD-SCDMA BTS/UE Measurement
● R&S FSV-K82/83 CDMA2000 BTS/MS Analysis
● R&S FSV-K84/85 1xEV-DO BTS/MS Analysis
● R&S FSV-K91 WLAN IEEE 802.11a/b/g/j/n
● R&S FSV-K93 WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM/OFDMA Analysis
● R&S FSV-K100/K104 EUTRA / LTE Downlink Measurement Application
● R&S FSV-K101/K105 EUTRA / LTE Uplink Measurement Application
These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument. The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Service Manual
This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument. It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications, instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It contains all information required for repairing the
R&S
FSV by replacing modules. The manual includes the following chapters:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Performance Test
Adjustment
Repair
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
6
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Preface
Conventions Used in the Documentation
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Software Update / Installing Options
Documents
Online Help
The online help contains context-specific help on operating the R&S
FSV and all available options. It describes both manual and remote operation. The online help is installed on the R&S
FSV by default, and is also available as an executable .chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument.
Release Notes
The release notes describe the installation of the firmware, new and modified functions, eliminated problems, and last minute changes to the documentation. The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes. The current release notes are provided in the Internet.
1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation
1.2.1 Typographical Conventions
The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention
"Graphical user interface elements"
KEYS
File names, commands, program code
Input
"References"
Description
All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks.
Key names are written in capital letters.
File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distinguished by their font.
Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks.
1.2.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions
When describing how to operate the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task. In this case, the procedure using the touchscreen is described. Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse. The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on-screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
7
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Preface
How to Use the Help System
The term "select" may refer to any of the described methods, i.e. using a finger on the touchscreen, a mouse pointer in the display, or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard.
1.3 How to Use the Help System
Calling context-sensitive and general help
► To display the general help dialog box, press the HELP key on the front panel.
The help dialog box "View" tab is displayed. A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed.
For standard Windows dialog boxes (e.g. File Properties, Print dialog etc.), no contextsensitive help is available.
► If the help is already displayed, press the softkey for which you want to display help.
A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed.
If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time, the submenu of the softkey is displayed.
Contents of the help dialog box
The help dialog box contains four tabs:
● "Contents" - contains a table of help contents
● "View" - contains a specific help topic
● "Index" - contains index entries to search for help topics
● "Zoom" - contains zoom functions for the help display
To change between these tabs, press the tab on the touchscreen.
Navigating in the table of contents
● To move through the displayed contents entries, use the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys. Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign.
● To display a help topic, press the ENTER key. The "View" tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed.
● To change to the next tab, press the tab on the touchscreen.
Navigating in the help topics
● To scroll through a page, use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys.
● To jump to the linked topic, press the link text on the touchscreen.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
8
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Preface
How to Use the Help System
Searching for a topic
1. Change to the "Index" tab.
2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in. The entries starting with these characters are displayed.
3. Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key.
4. Select the suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob.
5. Press the ENTER key to display the help topic.
The "View" tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed.
Changing the zoom
1. Change to the "Zoom" tab.
2. Set the zoom using the rotary knob. Four settings are available: 1-4. The smallest size is selected by number 1, the largest size is selected by number 4.
Closing the help window
► Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
9
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for I/Q Data
2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
The "Vector Signal Analysis" software option R&S
FSV-K70 performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single-carrier signals. To perform the measurements it converts RF signals into the complex baseband. It can also use the optional
Digital Baseband interface (R&S
FSV-B17 option) to analyze I/Q signals already delivered to the complex baseband.
For details on the Digital Baseband interface (R&S
FSV-B17 option), see the base unit description.
The following sections describe the digital signal processing hardware, the interplay of analog and digital filters for bandwidth limiting, modulation and demodulation filters, as well as the algorithms used by the measurement demodulator. The implemented modulation modes and the associated predefined symbol mappings are also listed.
The last part of this chapter deals with vector and scalar modulation errors.
2.1 Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for I/Q Data
The following sections describe the digital hardware used to capture I/Q data for vector signal analysis with the R&S
FSV-K70.
2.1.1 Block Diagram for RF Input
The following block diagram provides an overview on how RF input is processed in the
R&S
FSV-K70 option.
Fig. 2-1: Block diagram of digital hardware for RF input in vector signal analysis
After having passed several RF, IF and filter stages, the RF input signal is converted to an IF of 96 MHz and applied to an A/D converter with a sample frequency of exactly 128
MHz.
The digitized signal is then routed through two ICs for resampling (conversion of sample rate by a real factor) and for filtering and decimation (reduction of sample rate by an
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
10
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing integral factor). An equalizer filter before the resampler compensates for the frequency response of the analyzer's analog filter stages which would otherwise add to the modulation errors.
During operation, the filters and decimation factors of the instrument are set so that a sample frequency is obtained at the output of the decimation stage, which exactly corresponds to the following equation:
Sample rate = Symbol rate * Capture Oversampling (see
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158)
The complex output signal of the decimation stage is stored in the I/Q memory (record
buffer) and forwarded to a signal processor (DSP) for further processing.
2.1.2 Block Diagram for Digital Baseband Input
The following block diagram provides an overview on how digital baseband input is processed in the R&S
FSV-K70 option. The digital baseband input requires option R&S FSV-
B17.
Fig. 2-2: Block diagram of digital hardware for digital baseband input (B17) in vector signal analysis
The digital I/Q data stream is fed into the analyzer via the connector of the digital baseband interface (R&S
FSV-B17 option). There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband. The digital hardware just has to ensure that the final I/Q data stored in the record buffer has the correct sample rate; therefore, the signal is resampled and filtered.
2.2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R&S
FSV, as well as the bandwidth after each filter.
The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 2-3 .
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
11
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
Fig. 2-3: Block diagram of bandwidth-relevant filters for vector signal analysis
● After the IF Filter (only for RF input operation): bandwidth = 40 MHz.
● After the digital hardware section:
The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for.
Usually, the I/Q data has a usable bandwidth of about:
0.8 * sample rate = 0.8 * symbol rate * "Capture Oversampling"
For details refer to chapter 2.2.1, "I/Q Bandwidth" , on page 13.
The I/Q data's sample rate and bandwidth automatically scale themselves with the set symbol rate. For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for
"Capture Oversampling" leads to a sufficient I/Q data bandwidth. The whole spectrum of the input signal is captured, but most adjacent channels and interferers are effectively suppressed. Only for very wide signals (FSK, no TX-filter used) it can be necessary to try higher values for "Capture Oversampling" (see
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158), increasing the I/Q bandwidth. The I/Q data delivered to the DSP
section has no considerable amplitude or phase distortion and a suitable bandwidth.
The "I/Q Capture" dialog of the vector signal analysis shows the sample rate and the
usable I/Q bandwidth achieved for the current settings (see "I/Q Capture" on page 156).
● After the optional measurement filter:
The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various measurement filters which have different bandwidths.
The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the captured
I/Q data and the final measurement signal and reference signal. Note, however, that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above:
● Receive filter to prevent ISI (intersymbol-interference)
● filters necessary for various estimators
● others
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
12
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
2.2.1 I/Q Bandwidth
The bandwidth of the I/Q data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as
depends on:
● the used sample rate, which depends on the
– defined "Symbol Rate" (see
– defined "Capture Oversampling" (see
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158
● the type of input used (digital baseband input, RF input, etc)
The sample rate of the I/Q input data is:
Sample rate = Symbol rate * Capture Oversampling
Table 2-1: Value range for sample rate and symbol rate
Model/option Max. sample rate Min. symbol rate Max. symbol rate
(= max. sample rate / capt. oversampling)
R&S
FSV without bandwidth extension option
R&S
FSV with bandwidth extension option B70
R&S
FSV with
(active) bandwidth extension option
B160
45 MHz
128 MHz
1.28 GHz
25 Hz
25 Hz
25 Hz
11 MHz
32 MHz restricted to 160 MHz
1307.9002K39
12.5 MHz 25 Hz 3.125 MHz
Using this sample rate, the resulting I/Q data bandwidth can be determined from the figure
"Relation between maximum usable bandwidth and sample rate (RF input)" in the base unit description (section "Working with I/Q data)" for RF input operation or the figure
"Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input" in the description of the
Digital Baseband interface (R&S
FSV option B17).
The sample rate and the usable I/Q bandwidth achieved for the current settings is displayed in the "I/Q Capture Settings" dialog, see
2.2.2 Bandwidth Extension Option R&S
FSV-B160
The bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160 provides additional hardware, which makes a maximum usable I/Q bandwidth of 160
MHz possible. As opposed to the
R&S
FSV base unit, the R&S FSV-K70 application uses a software resampler which allows for a maximum sample rate up to 1.28
GHz.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
13
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
Usage of the optional hardware can be deactivated, if necessary, for example to reduce possible spurious effects.
2.2.2.1
Restrictions
The optional bandwidth extension R&S
FSV-B160 can not be activated if any of the following conditions apply:
● R&S FSV firmware versions previous to 2.0
● R&S FSV models 1321.3008Kx
● For center frequencies larger than 7 GHz
● With any trigger except for an external trigger
2.2.3 Demodulation Bandwidth (Measurement Bandwidth)
Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter. In these cases special care should be taken that no interference or adjacent channels occur within the demodulation band-
width. The "Capture Oversampling" parameter should be set to a low value (see "Capture
Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters (e.g.
root-raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter).
If no such filtering is performed, care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth.
2.2.4 Modulation and Demodulation Filters
Sample points are required for demodulation in the analyzer, where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present (symbol points). These points are also called ISI-free points (ISI = intersymbol interference). If the transmitter does not provide an ISI-free signal after the transmit filter (TX filter), this condition can be fulfilled by signal-specific filtering of the analyzer input signal (receive filter or Rx
filter). If an RRC (root-raised cosine) filter is used in the transmitter, an RRC filter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI-free points.
In many PSK systems, RRC filters are used as transmit, ISI and measurement filters. To determine the I/Q modulation error, the measurement signal must be compared with the corresponding ideal signal. For this purpose a reference filter is required which is calculated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the transmit filter (Tx filter) and the meas filter (see
).
If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well (e.g. to determine nonlinear signal distortions), no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the Transmit filter (see
In the baseband block diagrams (see figure 2-4 ), the system-theoretical transmitter and
analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation. For the sake of clearness,
RF stages, IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
14
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
For a correct demodulation, the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer:
● Transmit filter: filter characteristic of transmitter
● Meas filter:
– PSK, QAM, UserQAM, MSK:
The I and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter.
– FSK:
The instantaneous frequency of the measurement reference signal are filtered.
In many applications, this filter is identical with the ISI filter.
The receive filter (ISI filter) is configured internally depending on the Transmit filter. The goal is to produce intersymbol-interference-free points for the demodulation.
The reference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal (after meas filtering). It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters (convolution operation Transmit filter
* Meas Filter).
Table 2-2: Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters
Transmit filter Measurement filter
(analyzer)
Remarks
RC (raised cosine) -
RRC (root raised cosine)
GMSK
Linearized GMSK
Gauss
Rectangular
Half Sine
CDMA2000 1X FORWARD
CDMA2000 1X REVERSE
APCO25 C4FM
APCO25 H-CPM
APCO25 H-DQPSK
APCO25 H-D8PSK Narrow
APCO25 H-D8PSK Wide
EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape
EDGE Wide Pulse Shape
User
-
RRC
EDGE NSR
-
-
-
Low ISI Meas Filter
Low ISI Meas Filter
Rectangular
Rectangular
Low ISI Meas Filter
Low ISI Meas Filter
Low ISI Meas Filter
EDGE HSR (Narrow
Pulse)
EDGE HSR (Wide
Pulse)
Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without intersymbol interference (ISI) filter combination without ISI filter combination with low ISI standard specific filter; filter combination with ISI filter combination with low ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI filter combination without ISI standard specific filter; filter combination with ISI standard specific filter; filter combination with ISI filter combination with low ISI
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
15
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in the table above; they can be set in the R&S
FSV using "Meas filter = AUTO" (see
"Auto" on page 179). If RC (raised
cosine), RRC (root-raised cosine) and Gaussian filters are used, the Alpha (RC, RRC filters) or BT (Gaussian filters) parameters must be set in addition to the filter characteristic (roll-off factor). Typically the Alpha/BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of the transmission filter.
For FSK, the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal, not the
I/Q signal.
For MSK, the measurement filter filters the I and Q parts of the measurement signal and the reference signal (i.e. not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the MSK signal).
2.2.5 Transmit filters
The transmit filters required for common standards are provided by the R&S
FSV-K70.
Table 2-3: Overview of predefined Transmit filters
RC Raised cosine
RRC
Gauss
GMSK
Linearized GMSK
EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape
EDGE Wide Pulse Shape
Half Sine
APCO25 C4FM
APCO25 H-CPM
APCO25 H-DQPSK
APCO25 H-D8PSK Narrow
APCO25 H-D8PSK Wide
CDMA2000 1X Forward
CDMA2000 1X Reverse
Rectangular
Root raised cosine
Gauss filter
Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter; typically used for MSK
Standard-specific filter for GSM EDGE (3GPP TS 45.004), normal symbol rate
Standard-specific filter for GSM EDGE (higher symbol rate)
Standard-specific filter for GSM EDGE (higher symbol rate)
Half Sine filter
Filter for the APCO25 C4FM standard.
Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard.
Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard.
Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard.
Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard.
Filter for CDMA ONE forward link (TIA/EIA/IS-95-A May 1995) and
CDMA2000 1X forward link ( http://www.3gpp2.org/Public_html/ specs/C.S0002-C_v1.0.pdf
28/05/2002)
Filter for CDMA ONE forward link (TIA/EIA/IS-95-A May 1995) and
CDMA2000 1X reverse link ( http://www.3gpp2.org/Public_html/ specs/C.S0002-C_v1.0.pdf
28/05/2002)
Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
16
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
None
USER
No filter is used.
User-defined filter. Define the filter using the
2.2.6 Measurement Filters
The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way:
● the measurement signal (after coarse frequency, phase and timing synchronization have been achieved)
● the reference signal, i.e the I/Q symbols that have been determined in the demodulator and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter;
For MSK, PSK, QAM and User QAM the measurement filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals. For FSK, the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of these signals.
The R&S
FSV-K70 defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal. Thus, the measurement filter also shapes the spectrum of the error signal, which is used to calculate the EVM, for example.
In many applications the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter. However, unlike the measurement filter, the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement, but is only required to create the reference signal optimally.
The RX filter and the Transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) free system (see
Fig. 2-4: Measurement filter in the block diagram (MSK, PSK, QAM and UserQAM)
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
17
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
Fig. 2-5: Modulator with Transmit filter in detail
As the measurement filters of the R&S
FSV-K70 have low-pass characteristics, they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas/Ref/Error signal. The errors are weighted spectrally. Thus, turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and graphical error values. However, the measurement filter should be switched off if non-linear distortions have to be measured (they usually produce high frequency components).
Predefined measurement filters
The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the R&S
FSV-K70.
Table 2-4: Overview of predefined measurement filters
EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the "EDGE, Normal Symbol Rate" standard. (see 3GPP TS 45.005, chapter 4.6 Modulation Accuracy). The resulting system is NOT inter-symbol interference free.
EDGE HSR (Narrow Pulse)
EDGE HSR (Wide Pulse)
Gauss
Low ISI Meas Filter
Low Pass (Narrow)
Low Pass (Wide)
Rectangular
Measurement filter required for the "EDGE, High Symbol Rate,
Narrow Pulse" standard.
Measurement filter required for the "EDGE, High Symbol Rate,
Wide Pulse" standard.
Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT
Measurement filter implemented to retain a low intersymbol inferference. Best suited for eye diagrams or I/Q vector diagrams. Not necessarily suited for EVM evaluation due to amplification in the pass band.
Pass band up to F symbol
/2
Stop band starts at F symbol
(-40dB)
Pass band up to F symbol
Stop band starts at 1.5*F symbol
(-40dB)
Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period; integrate and dump effect
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
18
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
RRC
USER
Root Raised Cosine Filter. The roll-off parameter "Alpha" is set according to the Transmit filter if the "Auto (according to Transmit filter)" option is enabled (see
"Auto" on page 179). Otherwise it
must be set manually.
If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll-off parameter, the resulting system is inter-symbol interference free.
User-defined filter.
Define the filter using the "Load User Filter" on page 179 function
or the
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:USER
command.
For details see
chapter 2.2.7, "Customized Filters" , on page 19.
No measurement filter is used.
NONE
The frequency response of the available standard-specific measurement filters is shown in
chapter 7.1.6.2, "Measurement Filter" , on page 366.
2.2.7 Customized Filters
The analytical filter types RC (raised cosine), RRC (root-raised cosine) and GAUSSIAN as well as the most important standard-specific filters are already integrated in the
R&S
FSV-K70. In addition, it is possible to use user-defined measurement and Transmit filters. Customized filters may be useful for the following purposes:
● Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet.
● Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified (e.g. shortened) transmitter filters.
An external program ("FILTWIZ") is offered to convert user-defined filters. This program generates filter files (*.vaf) which can be transferred to the analyzer with a USB device, for example. The program can be downloaded together with a detailed description as a precompiled MATLAB® file (MATLAB pcode) on the Internet, at http://www.rohdeschwarz.com
(search term "FILTWIZ").
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
19
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing
Fig. 2-6: FILTWIZ - filter tool for the R&S FSV-K70
It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters. If a customized transmit filter is selected, the internal receive filter coefficients are calculated automatically on the fly.
Note that this is different to the R&S FSQ-K70, where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter.
If you upload a customized transmit filter and leave the measurement filter set to "automatic", the internally calculated receive filter will be used as measurement filter. Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal. The filter is optimized such that the intersymbol interference is low. Hence, you will probably be able to see a clear eye diagram and an Vector I/Q diagram with a recognizable constellation. However, a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement, which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter. In order to avoid noise enhancement, it is recommended that you:
● a) design your own measurement filter and upload it as a user filter
● b) select a suitable measurement filter from the list
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
20
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Transferring filter files to the R&S
FSV
You can transfer the (.vaf) filter files to the R&S FSV using a USB memory device.
To load a user transmit (TX) filter
1. 1. Open the "Modulation" tab of the "Modulation & Signal Description" dialog.
2. Select "Transmit filter Type": User.
3. Select "Load User Filter".
4. Load your .vaf file from the USB stick.
To load a user measurement filter
1. Open the "Measurement Filter" tab of the "Demodulation & Measurement Filter" dialog.
2. Select "Meas Filter Type": User.
3. Select "Load User Filter".
4. Load your .vaf file from the USB stick.
2.3 Symbol Mapping
Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to points or transitions in the I/Q plane (e.g. PSK and QAM).
In the analyzer, the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols from the sampled I/Q or frequency/time data records.
The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following. Unless characterized otherwise, symbol numbers are specified in hexadecimal form (MSB at the left).
2.3.1 Phase Shift Keying (PSK)
With this type of modulation, the information is represented by the absolute phase position of the received signal at the decision points. All transitions in the I/Q diagram are
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
21
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping possible. The complex constellation diagram is shown. The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule.
BPSK (NATURAL)
1 0
Fig. 2-7: Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping
QPSK
2 0
3 1
Fig. 2-8: Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB
S2
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
22
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
1
3 0
2
Fig. 2-9: Constellation diagram for QPSK (GRAY) including the symbol mapping
1 0
2 3
Fig. 2-10: Constellation diagram for QPSK (NATURAL) including the symbol mapping
1
3 0
2
Fig. 2-11: Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
23
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
8PSK
2
3
1
6 0
7 4
5
Fig. 2-12: Constellation diagram for 8PSK (GRAY) including the symbol mapping
2
3 1
4 0
5 7
6
Fig. 2-13: Constellation diagram for 8PSK (NATURAL) including the symbol mapping
4
6 0
2 1
3 5
7
Fig. 2-14: Constellation diagram for 8PSK including the symbol mapping for DVB S2
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
24
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
2.3.2 Rotating PSK
A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulation in which additional phase shifts occur. These phase shifts depend on the symbol number, e.g. for a
π/4-QPSK, the third symbol has an additional phase offset of (3-1)*
π/4. This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol.
The method is highly important in practical applications because it prevents signal transitions through the zeros in the I/Q plane. This reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier.
In practice, the method is used for 3
π/8-8PSK, for example, and (in conjunction with phase-differential coding) for
π/4-DQPSK.
Symbol mapping
The logical constellation diagram for 3
π/8-8PSK comprises 8 points that correspond to
the modulation level (see figure 2-15 ). A counter-clockwise offset (rotation) of 3
π/8 is inserted after each symbol transition.
2
0 3
1 7
5 6
4
Fig. 2-15: Constellation diagram for 3
π/8 8PSK before rotation including the symbol mapping for EDGE
Fig. 2-16: I/Q symbol stream after 3
π/8 rotation in I/Q plane if the symbol number "7" is transmitted six
times in a row
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
25
R&S
®
FSV-K70
2 0
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
3 1
Fig. 2-17: Constellation diagram for 3
π/4 QPSK including the symbol mapping for EDGE
1
2 0
3
Fig. 2-18: Constellation diagram for
π/4 QPSK (Natural) including the symbol mapping
2.3.3 Differential PSK
With differential PSK, the information is represented in the phase shift between two consecutive decision points. The absolute position of the complex sample value at the decision point does not carry information.
In the physical constellation diagram, the constellation points at the symbol decision points obtained after ISI-free demodulation are shown (as with common PSK methods).
This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer. The position of the constellation points is standard-specific. For example, some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals, while other standards define the coordinate axes.
In table 2-5 , the symbols are assigned to phase shifts. The QPSK (INMARSAT) mapping
corresponds to simple QPSK with phase-differential coding.
show two types of differential 8PSK modulation.
Another type of differential PSK modulation is shown in table 2-6 .
Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 2-8
. It can be used for modulation types with 3 bits/symbol, e.g. 8PSK.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
26
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chapter 2.3.4,
"Rotating Differential PSK Modulation" , on page 28.
Fig. 2-19: Constellation diagram for DQPSK (INMARSAT and NATURAL) including the symbol mapping
Table 2-5: DQPSK (INMARSAT)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
00
0°
01
-90°
10
+90°
11
180°
Fig. 2-20: Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25, APCO25 Phase
2, GRAY, NATURAL and TETRA
Table 2-6: D8PSK (NATURAL)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
000
Phase shift 0°
001
45°
010
90°
011
135°
100
180°
101
225°
110
270°
111
315°
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
27
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Table 2-7: D8PSK (GRAY)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
000
Phase shift 0°
Table 2-8: D8PSK (VDL)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
000
Phase shift 0°
001
45°
001
45°
010
135°
010
135°
011 100
90°
011
90°
270°
100
315°
101 110
315°
101
270°
225°
110
180°
111
180°
111
225°
2.3.4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation
Phase-differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift (e.g.
π/4 DQPSK = π/4 phase shift modulation + differential modulated 4PSK).
The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK.
The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISIfree demodulation.
Fig. 2-21: Constellation diagram for
π/4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2,
NADC, NATURAL, PDC, PHS, TETRA and TFTS; the
π/4 rotation is already compensated
for
Table 2-9:
π/4 DQPSK (NADC, PDC, PHS, TETRA)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
00
0°+45°
01
90°+45°
10
-90°+45°
11
-180°+45°
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
28
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Table 2-10:
π/4 DQPSK (TFTS)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
00 01
-180°+45° 90°+45°
Table 2-11:
π/4 DQPSK (Natural)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
00
0°+45°
Table 2-12:
π/4 DQPSK (APCO25 and APCO25Phase2)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
00
0°+45°
01
90°+45°
01
90°+45°
10
-90°+45°
11
0°+45°
10 11
-180°+45° -90°+45°
10
-90°+45°
11
-180°+45°
2.3.5 Offset QPSK
Offset QPSK differs from "normal" QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed by half a symbol period against the I component in the time domain. Hence, the symbol time instants of the I and the Q component do not coincide. The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
29
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Derivation of OQPSK
Table 2-13: I/Q diagram and constellation diagram
QPSK
2
1
0
-1
-2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
1
0
-1
-2
0 1 2 3 4
Time
6 7 8 9
[symbols]
1
0
1
0
PSK vector diagram with alpha = 0.35
2
OQPSK (delayed Q component)
2
1
0
-1
-2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
1
0
-1
-2
0 1 2 3 4
Time
7 8 9
[symbols]
1
0
1
0
OQPSK vector diagram with alpha = 0.35
2
1 1
0
-1
0
-1
-2
-2 -1 0
Inphase
1 2
-2
-2 -1 0
Inphase
1 2
Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal (with respect to "normal" QPSK) and, therefore, the demands on amplifier linearity by avoiding zero crossings.
A distinction is made in the analyzer display:
In the Vector I/Q result display of the measurement (or reference) signal, the time delay is not compensated for. The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in (
In the Constellation I/Q result display of the measurement (or reference) signal, the time delay is compensated for. The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
30
R&S
®
FSV-K70
OQPSK
2 0
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
3 1
Fig. 2-22: Constellation diagram for OQSK (GRAY) including the symbol mapping
2.3.6 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)
To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations, the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency. An instantaneous frequency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer.
2FSK (NATURAL)
With 2FSK, the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator:
Symbol
Numbers
1 1
0 -1
Fig. 2-23: Constellation diagram for 2FSK (NATURAL) including the logical symbol mapping
4FSK
With 4FSK, the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds (-2/3; 0; +2/3) normalized to the FSK reference deviation.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
31
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Symbol
Numbers
3 -1
2 1/3
1 -1/3
0 -1
Fig. 2-24: Constellation diagram for 4FSK (NATURAL) including the logical symbol mapping
2 -1
Symbol
Numbers
3 1/3
1 -1/3
0 -1
Fig. 2-25: Constellation diagram for 4FSK (GRAY) including the logical symbol mapping
1 -1
Symbol
Numbers
0 1/3
2 -1/3
3 -1
Fig. 2-26: Constellation diagram for 4FSK for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
32
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
8FSK (NATURAL)
7 1
6 5/7
5 3/7
Symbol
Numbers
4 1/7
3 -1/7
2 -3/7
1 -5/7
0 -1
Fig. 2-27: Constellation diagram for 8FSK (NATURAL) including the logical symbol mapping
2.3.7 Minimum Shift Keying (MSK)
MSK modulation causes modulation-dependent phase shifts of +/- 90° which can be shown in an Constellation I/Q diagram. As with PSK, demodulation is performed by evaluation of the phase positions.
Table 2-14: MSK (NATURAL)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
0
-90°
1
+90°
Table 2-15: MSK (GSM)
Logical symbol mapping
Modulation symbol (binary indication: MSB, LSB)
Phase shift
0
+90°
1
-90°
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
33
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
Fig. 2-28: MSK (for GSM and NATURAL) and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol mapping
Similar to PSK, differential coding can also be used with MSK. In this case, too, the information is represented by the transition of two consecutive symbols. The block diagram of the coder is shown below.
Fig. 2-29: DMSK: differential encoder in the transmitter
d i
input symbol {0;1} of differential encoder d i-1
input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d ' i
output symbol {0;1} of differential encoder
The logical symbol mapping is then performed on the XOR-coded bitstream d
'
.
2.3.8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)
In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase.
The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the I/Q plane.
To ensure reliable demodulation, symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet.
As a rule of thumb, the result length should correspond to at least 8 times the modulation order. For example, with 64 QAM, a result length of at least 8*64 = 512 symbols should be used.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
34
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
QAM Mappings
The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant, which is always rotated by
π/2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a (GRAYcoded) prefix for each quadrant.
Table 2-16: Derivation of QAM mappings
In the following diagrams, the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form.
0 1 3 2
0000 0001 0011 0010
4
C
5
D
7
F
6
0100 0101 0111 0110
E
1100 1101 1111 1110
8 9 B A
1000 1001 1011 1010
Fig. 2-30: Constellation diagram for 16QAM (GRAY) including the logical symbol mapping (hexadecimal and binary)
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
35
R&S
®
FSV-K70
B 9 1
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
3
1011 1001 0001 0011
A
E
8
C
0
4
2
1010 1000 0000 0010
6
1110 1100 0100 0110
F D 5 7
1111 1101 0101 0111
Fig. 2-31: Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE (hexadecimal and binary)
B 9 2 3
1011 1001 0010 0011
A 8 0 1
1010 1000 0000 0001
D C 4 6
1101 1100 0100 0110
F E 5 7
1111 1110 0101 0111
Fig. 2-32: Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB-C (hexadecimal and binary)
17 13 06 02
10111 10011 00110 00010
12 15 11 04 05 07
10010 10101 10001 00100 00101 00111
16 14 10 00 01 03
10110 10100 10000 00000 00001 00011
1B 19 18 08 0C 0E
11011 11001 11000 01000 01100 01110
1F 1D 1C 09 0D 0A
11111 11101 11100 01001 01101 01010
1A 1E 0B 0F
11010 11110 01011 01111
Fig. 2-33: Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB-C (hexadecimal and binary)
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
36
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
2C 2E 26 24 08 09 0D 0C
2D 2F 27 25 0A 0B 0F 0E
29 2B 23 21 02 03 07 06
28 2A 22 20 00 01 05 04
34 35 31 30 10 12 1A 18
36 37 33 32 11 13 1B 19
3E 3F 3B 3A 15 17 1F 1D
3C 3D 39 38 14 16 1E 1C
001000 001001 001101 001100
001010 001011
000010 000011
001111 001110
000111 000110
000000 000001 000101 000100
Fig. 2-34: Constellation diagram for 64QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB-C (hexadecimal and binary); the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only.
0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010
0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000
0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101
0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111
0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111
0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101
1A 1B 0B 0A
18 19 09 08
10 11 15 14 1C 1D
12 13 17 16 1E 1F
02 03 07 06 0E 0F
00 01 05 04 0C 0D
Fig. 2-35: Constellation diagram for 128QAM including the logical symbol mapping (hexadecimal and binary); the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only
20 21 25 24 34 35 31 30
22 23 27 26 36 37 33 32
2A 2B 2F 2E 3E 3F 3B 3A
28 29 2D 2C 3C 3D 39 38
08 09 0D 0C 1C 1D 19 18
0A 0B 0F 0E 1E 1F 1B 1A
02 03 07 06 16 17 13 12
00 01 05 04 14 15 11 10
Fig. 2-36: Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping (hexadecimal); the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
37
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
2.3.9 User QAM
In the case of a User QAM modulation, the information can be represented by the signal amplitude and/or the signal phase.
16APSK
A 8
2 0
6
R2
E
R1
C
4
F D
7 5
3 1
B 9
Fig. 2-37: Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB-S2
2/3
3/4
4/5
5/6
8/9
9/10
For DVB-S2 16APSK mappings, the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius (
γ = R2/R1) depends on the utilized code rate and complies with
Table 2-17: Optimum constellation radius ratio
γ (linear channel) for 16APSK
Code Rate Modulation / coding spectral efficiency
γ
2.66
2.99
3.19
3.32
3.55
3.59
3.15
2.85
2.75
2.70
2.60
2.57
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
38
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
32APSK
0D
1D 09
1C
1E
0C
R3
04
05
14
01
R2
15
R1
11
16
17 13
00
10
12
19
08
18
0E 06
07 03
02 1A
1F 0A
0F 1B
0B
Fig. 2-38: Constellation diagram for 32APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB-S2
2/3
3/4
4/5
5/6
8/9
For DVB-S2 32APSK mappings, the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius (
γ
1
= R2/R1) and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius (
γ
2
depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 2-18
.
Table 2-18: Optimum constellation radius ratios
γ
1
and
γ
2
(linear channel) for 32APSK
Code Rate Modulation / coding spectral efficiency
γ
1
γ
2
3.74
3.99
4.15
4.43
4.49
2.84
2.72
2.64
2.54
2.53
5.27
4.87
4.64
4.33
4.30
OOK
OOK stands for "On Off Keying" and is often also referred to as (binary) Amplitude Shift
Keying (ASK). With this type of modulation, the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
39
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Symbol Mapping
0 1
Fig. 2-39: Constellation diagram for OOK
4ASK
4ASK is a 4-ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type. With this type of modulation, the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
40
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Predefined Standards and Settings
0 1 2 3
Fig. 2-40: Constellation diagram for 4ASK
2.4 Predefined Standards and Settings
In the "Digital Standards" menu, predefined basic settings for standards can be selected
and user-defined standards stored (see "Digital Standards" on page 113).
The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large number of mobile radio networks. The instrument comes prepared with the following settings for those standards:
● Capture length and result length
● Signal description
● Modulation
● Transmit filter and measurement filter
● Burst/Pattern search configuration
● Result range alignment
● Evaluation range settings
● Display configuration
The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate selecting a standard.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
41
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Predefined Standards and Settings
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
42
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Predefined Standards and Settings
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
43
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Predefined Standards and Settings
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
44
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Predefined Standards and Settings
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
45
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Predefined Standards and Settings
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
46
R&S
®
FSV-K70
2.5 Demodulation Overview
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview
Fig. 2-41: Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
47
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview
The figure 2-41 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal
analysis option. The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left (in grey) and their appropriate settings at the right (in blue).
Burst Search
In this stage, the Capture Buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal description. The search itself can be switched on or off via the "Burst Search" dialog (see
"Burst Search" on page 162). A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next pro-
cessing stage.
IQ Pattern Search
The "IQ Pattern Search" is performed on the Capture Buffer. This means the R&S
FSV-
K70 option modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter (Tx filter) and the modulation scheme. Subsequently, it searches the Capture Buffer for this IQ pattern, i.e. the IQ waveform of the pattern. It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts, i.e. the IQ pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the Burst
Search stage. If the burst search is switched off, the whole Capture Buffer is searched for the IQ pattern. A list of all detected IQ patterns is passed on to the next processing stage. It is important to note that the R&S
FSV-K70 option can only search for one pattern at a time.
The pattern search can be switched on or off via the "Pattern Search" dialog (see "Pattern
Extraction of Result Range
The Result Range can be aligned to a burst, a pattern or simply the start of the Capture
Buffer (see "Result Range" on page 169). Within this stage, the Result Range is cut from
the Capture Buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user, e.g. the start of a detected burst. The R&S
FSV-K70 option automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected Result Range.
Demodulation & Symbol Decisions
This stage operates on the extracted Result Range and aims at making the correct symbol decisions. Within this stage, a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency offset, the carrier phase, the scaling and the timing takes place. Furthermore, an automatically selected internal receive filter (Rx filter) is used in order to remove the inter-symbol interference as effectively as possible. The outputs of this stage are the (coarsely) synchronized measurement signal and the symbol decisions (bits). The symbol decisions are later used for the "Pattern Symbol Check" stage and for the "Reference Signal Generation" stage.
Pattern Symbol Check
The "IQ Pattern Search" stage can only detect whether the similarity between the IQ pattern and the Capture Buffer exceeds a certain threshold and, in this way, find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found.
Within this stage, the R&S
FSV-K70 checks whether the pattern symbols (bits) really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre-detected position. E.g. if one out of 20
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
48
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview symbols does not coincide, the "IQ Pattern Search" stage might detect this IQ pattern, but the "Pattern Symbol Check" stage will decline it.
Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on.
Reference Signal Generation
The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifications of the signal model, i.e. the modulation scheme and the transmit filter (Tx filter).
Measurement Filtering
Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter.
Synchronization
In this stage, the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated. For PSK,
QAM and MSK modulated signals, an estimation algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude, signal timing, carrier frequency error, phase error, IQ offset, gain imbalance, quadrature error and the amplitude droop. Alternatively, it is possible to disable the estimation algorithm.
For FSK modulated signals, estimates for the signal amplitude, signal timing, carrier frequency error, FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated. The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates. Compensation for
FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled.
For more information on synchronization see
●
chapter 2.6.1.2, "Estimation" , on page 57
●
Result Display
The selected measurement results are displayed on the screen(s). Configuration of the screens can be performed via the "Display Configuration" dialog (see
"Display Configuration" , on page 179).
A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sections.
2.5.1 Burst Search
The burst search is performed only if it is switched on. Otherwise, this stage is skipped.
It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted. This ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up.
In order to eliminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself, the instantaneous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving average filter is applied. The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
49
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview
The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatically chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified. With the help of the detected edges and some further processing, it is possible to decide whether the burst "candidates" comply with the user settings.
All bursts must have a length between ("Min Burst Length" – "Search Tolerance") and
("Max Burst Length" + "Search Tolerance") to be accepted. See "Continuous Signal /
"Search Tolerance" on page 163 for a more detailed
description of these parameters.
Fig. 2-42: Burst Search parameters
You can influence the robustness of the burst search directly by entering the correct minimum gap length (see
"Min Gap Length" on page 163), minimum burst length and
maximum burst length. Refer to
for an illustration of the three parameters.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
50
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview
Fig. 2-43: Burst search algorithm
2.5.2 I/Q Pattern Search
The I/Q pattern search is performed only if it is switched on. Otherwise, this stage is skipped. The main benefit of the I/Q pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern. Furthermore, this stage can function as a filter: If the burst search and I/Q pattern search are switched on, and the parameter "Meas Only If Pattern
Symbols Correct" is set to true, only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated (see
"Meas only if pattern symbols correct" on page 165).
During the I/Q pattern search stage, the capture buffer is searched for an I/Q pattern by trying different time and frequency hypotheses. The IQ pattern is generated internally, based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description (i.e.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
51
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview modulation scheme and transmit filter). The IQ pattern search can also be referred to as the I/Q waveform. An I/Q pattern is considered detected if the correlation metric, i.e. the correlation value between the ideal IQ pattern and capture buffer, exceeds a specified
"I/Q Correlation Threshold" (see
"I/Q Correlation Threshold" on page 165.)
If the burst search is switched on, the I/Q pattern search only searches the I/Q pattern in bursts previously detected by the burst search. Furthermore, it only finds the first I/Q pattern within each burst. If the burst search is switched off, the I/Q pattern search searches for the I/Q pattern in the entire capture buffer.
2.5.3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions
This stage operates on the Result Range and aims to make the correct symbol decisions.
The algorithm is illustrated in figure 2-44 using the example of a QPSK modulation. After
timing and scaling recovery, a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed.
After this coarse synchronization, the R&S
FSV-K70 option makes symbol decisions, i.e.
recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test (DUT).
Typically, the employed estimators are "non-data-aided" (NDA) estimators. This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence. Since the local oscillators (LO) of the transmitter (device under test) and the receiver (R&S
FSV) are normally not coupled, their phase offset with respect to each other is unknown. The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R&S
FSV adds a further unknown phase offset.
Due to this unknown phase offset, the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e.g. a PSK constellation. For example, in the case of non-differential QPSK modulation, the measurement signal, the reference signal and the decided IQ symbols may have a constant phase offset of {0,
π/2, π, or 3π/2}. This offset can only be detected and eliminated if a
If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transition, e.g. differential PSK or MSK, the absolute phase position is not an issue. Thus, the ambiguity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol decisions.
If the measurement signal contains a known pattern, it is also possible to use a "dataaided" (DA) estimator at this stage. This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence, i.e. the pattern. If the signal contains a pattern, it is possible to choose between the above-described non-data-aided estimator and the data-aided estimator with the setting "
Coarse Synchronization : Pattern". If the data-aided estimator is
employed, the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
52
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview
Fig. 2-44: Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
53
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Demodulation Overview
2.5.4 Pattern Symbol Check
This stage performs a bit-by-bit comparison between the selected pattern and the demodulated bits. It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at positions that have been identified by the IQ pattern search as possible pattern positions. The
algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 2-45 .
First, the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the
"Demodulation & Symbol Decisions" stage. This means that the symbol stream is cut at
the position that has been detected by the I/Q Pattern Search as the start of the pattern.
The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern.
If the demodulation has been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position, the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern. For example, in the case of QPSK modulation, the rotational symmetry has the order four, i.e. there are four pattern hypotheses. If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses, the pattern is declared as "found" and the absolute phase corresponding to the appropriate hypothesis is passed on. Both the symbol decisions and the
IQ measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase (for the whole result range), thus resolving the phase ambiguity.
For more information refer to:
●
chapter 2.5.3, "Demodulation and Symbol Decisions" , on page 52
●
chapter 2.5.2, "I/Q Pattern Search" , on page 51
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
54
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-45: Pattern Symbol Check algorithm
2.6 Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
This section describes the signal and error models used within the R&S
FSV-K70 VSA option. The estimation algorithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined. The chapter is divided into two parts:
2.6.1
2.6.1.1
2.6.1.2
2.6.1.3
2.6.2
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
55
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
2.6.2.1
2.6.2.2
2.6.2.3
2.6.1 PSK, QAM and MSK Modulation
2.6.1.1
Error Model
Fig. 2-46: Modelling Modulation Errors
The measured signal model for PSK, QAM and MSK modulation is depicted in
figure 2-46 and can be expressed as
MEAS
g
I
REF
I
c
I
j
g
Q
REF
Q
c
Q
e j
e j
2
f
0
t
t
n
(
t
) where:
REF
I
(t) and REF
Q
(t): the inphase and quadrature component of the reference signal g
I
and g
Q
: the effects of the gain imbalance c
I
and c
Q
: the effects of an IQ offset
ϑ: the quadrature error
α: the amplitude droop f
0
: the carrier frequency offset
φ: the carrier phase offset
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
56
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Շ: the timing offset n(t): a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power
2.6.1.2
Estimation
The R&S
FSV-K70 option includes two synchronization stages. The first stage has already been described in the context of the "Demodulation & Symbol Decisions" block
(see chapter 2.5.3, "Demodulation and Symbol Decisions" , on page 52).
The second stage is realized within the "Synchronization" block. Here, the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude. This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector :
arg min
t
MEAS
REF
2
The minimization takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points/
parameter, i.e.
t
n
T
E
with T
E
: the sampling period used for estimation
Details on the estimation model and also the parameter vector can be found in
chapter 2.6, "Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors" , on page 55.
Subsequently, the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vector. Note that with a subset of the parameters, you can enable or disable correction (see
Estimation ranges
The "estimation ranges" are determined internally according to the signal description:
● For continuous signals, the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range, since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants.
● For bursted signals, the estimation range corresponds to the overlapping area of the detected burst and the "Result Range". Furthermore, the Run-In/Run-Out ranges
(see
"Continuous Signal / Burst Signal" on page 151) are explicitly excluded from
the estimation range.
In the special case that the signal is indicated as a "burst signal", but is so highly distorted that the burst search cannot detect a burst, the estimation range corresponds to the pattern and (if an offset of the pattern is indicated) the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
57
R&S
®
FSV-K70
2.6.1.3
Modulation Errors
Error vector (EV)
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-47: Modulation error: error vector
The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vector (Meas vector) and the reference signal vector (Ref vector).
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM)
Fig. 2-48: Modulation error: EVM, magnitude error, phase error
The magnitude of the error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magnitude
(EVM). It is commonly normalized to the mean reference power. The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error, see below.
Magnitude Error
The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector mag-
nitude and the reference vector magnitude (see figure 2-48
).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
58
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Phase Error
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-49: Modulation error: Phase error, error vector phase
The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the reference vector.
PHASE
_
ERR
PHASE
MEAS
PHASE
REF
This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measurements.
The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase. The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector (see
The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described on the next pages. All diagrams show the equivalent, complex baseband signal.
Modulation Error Ratio (MER)
The modulation error ratio (MER) is closely related to EVM:
MER
20
log
10
(
EVM
) where the EVM is normalized to the mean reference power.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
59
R&S
®
FSV-K70
I/Q Offset (Origin Offset)
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-50: Effect of an I/Q or origin offset after demodulation and error compensation
figure 2-50 shows the effect of an I/Q offset in the transmitter.
The I/Q offset can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings. In this case, the offset does not affect the EVM.
Gain Imbalance
Fig. 2-51: Effect of gain imbalance
The gain difference in the I and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance. The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and
the unit circle are shown in figure 2-51 . In the example, the gain in the I channel is slightly
reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the I direction. The unit circle of the ideal constellation points has an elliptic shape.
The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings. In this case, the imbalance does not affect the EVM.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
60
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Note that the gain imbalance is not estimated (and cannot be compensated for) in a BPSK signal.
Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements
The distortions "gain imbalance" and "quadrature error" can only be measured without ambiguity, if the following two conditions are fullfilled:
● a pattern is detected
● the modulation is a non-differential, non-rotating QAM or PSK
Otherwise, only the measurement parameter "IQ Imbalance", which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error, is significant.
Quadrature Error
Fig. 2-52: Effect of Quadrature Error
The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure
.
In this diagram, the I and Q components of the modulated carrier are of identical amplitude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90°.
This error also distorts the coordinates. In the example in figure figure 2-52 the Q axis is
shifted.
Note that the quadrature error is not estimated (and cannot be compensated for) in a
BPSK signal.
I/Q Imbalance
The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error parameter I/Q imbalance.
B
g
I g
I
g
Q
e j
g
Q
e j
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
61
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors where g
I
and g
Q
are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component and
θ represents the quadrature error.
The I/Q imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings. In this case, the I/Q imbalance does not affect the EVM.
Note that the I/Q imbalance is not estimated (and cannot be compensated for) in a BPSK signal.
Amplitude Droop
The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop.
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 50 100
Time (Symbols)
150 200
Fig. 2-53: Effect of amplitude droop
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
62
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Gain Distortion
Table 2-20: Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions
Nonlinear distortions: amplitude distortion (transmitter)
Amplitude distortion (analyzer)
The table 2-20 illustrates the effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64QAM signal
(only the 1st quadrant is shown). The transfer function is level-dependent: the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected. The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is mini-
shows the signal after scaling.
Table 2-21: Amplitude transfer functions
Amplitude transfer function (transmitter) Amplitude transfer function (analyzer)
table 2-21 shows a logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer functions. The analyzer
trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
63
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Phase Distortion
Table 2-22: Effect of nonlinear phase distortions
Nonlinear distortions: phase distortion (transmitter) Phase distortion (analyzer)
The table 2-22 illustrates the effect of nonlinear phase distortions on a 64QAM signal
(only the 1st quadrant is shown). The transfer function is level-dependent: the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected. These effects are caused, for instance, by saturation in the transmitter output stages. The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is mini-
shows the signal after scaling.
Table 2-23: Phase transfer functions
Nonlinear distortions: phase distortion (transmitter) Phase distortions (analyzer)
show a logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions. The analyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter trace.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
64
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Noise
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-54: Additive noise
The figure 2-54 shows a 64QAM signal (only the 1st quadrant is shown) with additive
noise. The symbol decision thresholds are also shown.
The noise signal forms a "cloud" around the ideal symbol point in the constellation diagram. Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate.
Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings. When an incorrect filter is selected, crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI-free points. The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements.
The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation I/Q diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal.
2.6.2 FSK Modulation
Signal Model
Frequency shift keying (FSK) involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal. As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM, the
FSK process is a non-linear transform of the transmitted data into the transmitted waveform.
A sequence of symbols {s i
} are modulated using a "frequency pulse" g(t) to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform, denoted by
f
REF
(t) and defined as:
f
REF
h
i s i g
t
i
T
where f
Symb
=1/T is the symbol rate and h is a scaling factor, termed the modulation index.
The transmitted (or reference) FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
65
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
REF
e j
2
t
f
REF
du
e j
REF
where
φ
REF
(t) denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform. In the R&S
FSV-K70 a continuous phase FSK signal is assumed, which is ensured by the integral in the expression for REF(t). A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in Figure
Fig. 2-55: Reference complex baseband FSK signal generation
Reference Deviation
The transmitted symbols {s i
} are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real-valued constellation of M values; {
ς
1
,
ς
2
,...,
ς
M
}. The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by
ς
MAX
. The maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by:
MAX
2
h
MAX
g
dt
The reference deviation of the FSK signal is defined as:
REF
2
MAX
T
1
T h
MAX
g
dt
In the R&S
FSV-K70 the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that
g
dt
1
2 and the constellation for M FSK is assumed to be {
±1, ±3, ..., ±(M-1)}, which implies . The
expression for the reference deviation
in terms of the modulation index is therefore given by:
REF
1
2
h
M
1
f
Symb
The above formula provides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK signal with known symbol rate and modulation index.
Calculation examples:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
66
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK (i.e. 2FSK) modulation with a modulation index of h=1/2 at a symbol rate of 270.8333 KHz. The reference deviation is therefore given by:
REF
1
2
1
2
2
1
270.8333
kHz
67.7083
kHz
The APCO Project 25 standard (phase 2) defines a H-CPM signal (i.e. 4FSK) with a modulation index of h=1/3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz. The reference deviation is:
REF
1
2
1
3
4
1
6 kHz
3 kHz
2.6.2.1
Error Model
The FSK measurement model used assumes that signal distortions in both the magnitude and phase/frequency are present, as well as additive noise. The measured signal model is expressed as:
MEAS
A
DIST
e j
DIST
n
with
n(t) is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power,
A
DIST
(t) is the distorted magnitude model and
φ
DIST(t)
is the distorted phase model.
The magnitude model is given by:
A
DIST
K
e
t
with
K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and
⍺ is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second.
The phase model is given by:
DIST
B
REF
C
t
1
2
D
t
2
with
B is a scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error,
C is a carrier frequency offset in radians per second,
D is a frequency drift in radians per second per second,
τ is a timing offset in seconds and ϕ is a phase offset in radians.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
67
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
For the above phase model, an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as:
f
DIST
B
f
REF
f
0
f d
t
with
B is the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error,
f
0
=C/(2
·π) is a carrier frequency offset in Hz,
f
0
=D/(2
·π) is a frequency drift in Hz per second and
τ is the timing offset in seconds.
The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by:
MEAS
K
e
t
e j
e j
2
B
t
f
REF
du
f
0
t
1
2
f d
t
2
n
2.6.2.2
Estimation
The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase/frequency distortions, as illustrated in
. It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal, as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range. For
details on the estimation range, see chapter 2.6.1.2, "Estimation" , on page 57.
Fig. 2-56: FSK Estimation Strategy
In
MEAS(n) denotes the sampled (complex baseband) measured signal waveform. The magnitude samples are denoted A
MEAS
(n), while the instantaneous frequency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by f
MEAS
(n) and
f
REF
(n) respectively. The dashed outline of the "Meas Filter" block indicates that this operation is optionally (de-) activated based on the corresponding user settings (see
"Measurement Filter" on page 178 ).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
68
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
For the estimation of the magnitude parameters, the following least-squares criterion is minimized:
C
MAG
K
,
n
A
MEAS
K
e
n
T
E
2 with respect to the model parameters K and
⍺, where T
E
denotes the sampling period
used for estimation (see "Estimation Points/Sym" on page 176).
For estimation of the frequency parameters, the following least-squares criterion is minimized:
C
FREQ
B
,
f
0
,
f d
,
n f
MEAS
B
f
REF
f
0
f d
n
T
E
2 with respect to the model parameters B, f
0
, f
d
and
τ. The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a (possibly fractional) delay of samples.
For FSK modulation the default sampling period used for estimation is the capture sampling period.
2.6.2.3
Modulation Errors
A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse. Examples of carrier drift and
reference deviation are shown in figure 2-57 and
Carrier frequency drift
A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time. The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal
.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
69
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-57: The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier frequency drift
FSK deviation error
The FSK deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user (see
FSK signal is demonstrated in
.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
70
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors
Fig. 2-58: The reference and measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference deviation error
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
71
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
3 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
To open the VSA menu
If the "Vector Signal Analysis" (VSA) mode is not the active measurement mode, press the MODE key and select the "VSA" softkey.
If the "VSA" mode is already active, press the HOME key. The "VSA" menu is displayed.
After activation, the contents of the menus are adapted to the functions of the VSA option.
The menus of the option are described in
chapter 3.2, "Softkeys and Menu Overview for
Menu and Softkey Description
Apart from the "Span", "Bandwidth" and "Marker Functions" menus, which are not available in the "VSA" mode, all menus not mentioned below are provided as described for the base unit.
The MEAS key opens a submenu identical to the "VSA" menu, and additionally displays
the chapter 3.3.1.6, "Display Configuration" , on page 179 dialog box when pressed.
Measurement Result Display
Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available. The different display types are described in
chapter 3.1, "Measurement Result Display" , on page 73.
Importing and Exporting I/Q Data
As of firmware version 1.60, I/Q data can be imported from a file for processing in
R&S
FSV-K70, and captured I/Q data can be stored to a file ("IQ Import"/"IQ Export" softkeys in the "Save/Rcl" menu). For details see the base unit description.
Further Information
●
chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode Overview" , on page 205
●
chapter 3.4.2, "ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data" , on page 206
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
72
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
3.1.7
3.2
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
3.2.1
FSV-K70)................................................................112
3.2.2
Softkeys of the Frequency Menu (R&S
FSV-K70) .....................................................114
3.2.3
SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu (R&S
FSV-K70) ..........................................115
3.2.4
Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu (R&S
FSV-K70).........................................................121
3.2.5
Softkeys of the Sweep Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)............................................................122
3.2.6
Softkeys of the Trace Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)..............................................................125
3.2.7
Softkeys of the Trigger Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)............................................................128
3.2.8
Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)...................................................131
3.2.9
Softkeys of the Marker Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)............................................................132
3.2.10
Softkeys of the Marker To Menu (R&S
FSV-K70).......................................................135
3.2.11
3.2.12
Softkeys of the Input/Output menu (R&S
FSV-K70)...................................................140
3.2.13
Softkeys of the Save/Recall Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)....................................................143
3.2.14
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements.....................................204
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.1 Measurement Result Display
Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available. You select the
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
73
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display available depends on the selected data source. Furthermore, for some result types, you can display either spectral, statistical, or time domain results. You can define which part of the signal is to be evaluated and configure the alignment of the result range (see
chapter 3.3.1.4, "Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings" , on page 169). You can
also define how detailed the trace is displayed ( Display Points/Sym
parameter in the
"Display Configuration" dialog).
Distinction between Source, Result type and Result type transformation
The "Display Config" dialog provides the following settings:
● Source
Here you can choose the data source for which you want to display the results.
● Result type
Here you can specify the way you want to look at the "Source". For example, select
"Magnitude Absolute" to see the magnitude of your measurement signal. The available choices depend on the selected source. For example, an eye diagram of the inphase component can only be selected if the source for the current screen is "Meas
& Ref Signal".
● Result type transformation
For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common "over time" representation of the measurement, but also the spectrum or the statistics (in form of a histogram). Furthermore, it is possible to specify how many points (i.e. samples) per symbol should be displayed. For example, it might make sense for certain measure-
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
74
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display ment results to only display the symbol instants. In this case, the parameter "Display
Points/Sym" should be set to 1.
3.1.1 Result types
The following result types are available, depending on the source type:
3.1.1.1
Magnitude Absolute
Magnitude of the source signal; the actual signal amplitude is displayed
Mag
MEAS
MEAS
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
Available for source types:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
75
R&S
®
FSV-K70
● Capture Buffer
● Meas & Ref Signal
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-1: Result display "Magnitude Absolute" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM MAGN to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.2
Magnitude Relative
Magnitude of the source signal; the signal amplitude is scaled to the ideal reference signal
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
76
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-2: Result display "Magnitude Relative" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM MAGN to define the result type (see
DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
to define relative values (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.3
Phase Wrap
The phase or argument of the signal; the display is limited to the phase value range of
[-180°, 180°]
Phase
MEAS
MEAS
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
77
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-3: Result display "Phase Wrap" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM PHASe to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.4
Phase Unwrap
The phase of the signal; the display is not limited to [-180°, 180°].
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
78
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-4: Result display "Phase Unwrap" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM UPHase to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.5
Frequency Absolute
The instantaneous frequency of the signal source; the absolute value is displayed in Hz.
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
● Capture Buffer
Meas&Ref signal:
FREQ
MEAS
2
1
d dt
MEAS
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
Capture buffer:
FREQ
CAPT
.
2
1
d dt
Capt
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
79
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
When evaluating the capture buffer, the absolute frequency is derived from the measured phase, with T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the capture oversampling parameter (see
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158).
This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation, but can also be used for the PSK/QAM modulations. However, since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the I/Q plane, in this case you might notice uncritical spikes.
This is due to the fact that the phase of zero (or a complex value close to zero) is of limited significance, but still influences the result of the instantaneous frequency measurement.
Fig. 3-5: Result display "Frequency Absolute" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM FREQ to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.6
Frequency Relative
The instantaneous frequency of the signal source.
The results are normalized to the symbol rate (PSK and QAM modulated signals), the estimated FSK deviation (FSK modulated signals) or one quarter of the symbol rate (MSK modulated signals).
FREQ
MEAS
2
1
d dt
MEAS
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
80
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation, but can
also be used for the PSK/QAM modulations. See also the note for Frequency Absolute .
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
Fig. 3-6: Result display "Frequency Relative" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM FREQ to define the result type (see
DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
to define relative values (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.7
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference signal in separate measurement diagrams; the x-axis (scaled in time units or symbols) is identical for both diagrams
The scaling of the capture buffer is
● relative to the current reference level if you are using the RF input and
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
81
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
● relative to the full scale level if you are using the I/Q input
Available for source types:
● Capture Buffer
● Meas & Ref Signal
● Error Vector
Fig. 3-7: Result display "Real/Imag (I/Q)" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM RIMag to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.8
Eye Diagram Real (I)
The eye pattern of the inphase (I) channel; the x-axis value range is from -1 to +1 symbols
(MSK: -2 to +2)
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
82
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-8: Result display "Eye Diagram Real (I)" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM IEYE to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.9
Eye Diagram Imag (Q)
The eye pattern of the quadrature (Q) channel; the x-axis range is from -1 to +1 symbols
(MSK: -2 to +2)
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
83
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-9: Result display "Eye Diagram Imag (Q)" in normal mode
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM QEYE to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.10
Eye Diagram Frequency
Shows the eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and/or the reference signal. The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range (capture buffer).
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM FEYE to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
84
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
3.1.1.11
Constellation I/Q
The complex source signal (without inter-symbol interference) as an X/Y plot; only the
(de-rotated) symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
MSK QPSK
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM CONS to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.12
Constellation I/Q (Rotated)
The complex source signal as an X/Y plot; As opposed to the common Constellation I/Q display, the symbol decision instants, including the rotated ones, are drawn and not connected
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modulation.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
85
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-10: Result display "Constellation I/Q (Rotated)" vs. common "Constellation I/Q" for 8PSK modulation
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM RCON to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.13
Vector I/Q
The complex source signal as an X/Y plot; all available samples (as defined by the display points per symbol parameter, see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183) are drawn and
connected.
The scaling of the capture buffer is:
● relative to the current reference level if you are using the RF input
● relative to the full scale level if you are using the I/Q input
Available for source types:
● Capture Buffer
● Meas & Ref Signal
● Error Vector
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
86
R&S
®
FSV-K70
MSK
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
QPSK
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM COMP to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.14
Constellation Frequency
The instantenous frequency of the source signal (without inter-symbol interference) as an X/Y plot; only the symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected.
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
87
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM CONF to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.15
Vector Frequency
The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X/Y plot; all available samples (as defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183)) are drawn and connected.
Available for source types:
● Meas & Ref Signal
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM COVF to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.16
Symbol Table
Symbol numbers are displayed as a table. Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table. The symbols can be displayed in binary, octal, hexadecimal or decimal format.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
88
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Example:
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-11: Result display for "Symbols" in binary mode
If a pattern search is active, a found pattern is indicated in the symbol table, as well.
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:SYMB'
to define the required source type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.17
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM)
Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time.
EVM
EV
C
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization. By default
C² is the mean power of the reference signal.
C
1
K
k
REF
2 and
T
duration of symbol periods
Note that k=0.5
·n·T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
89
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-12: Result display "Error Vector Magnitude" in normal mode
Available for source types:
● Error Vector
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM MAGN to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.18
Magnitude Error
Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal (as a function of symbols over time)
MAG
_
ERR
MAG
MEAS
MAG
REF
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
90
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-13: Result display "Magnitude Error" in normal mode
Available for source types:
● Modulation Errors
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM MAGN to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.19
Phase Error
Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time.
PHASE
_
ERR
PHASE
MEAS
PHASE
REF
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
91
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-14: Result display "Phase Error" in normal mode
Available for source types:
● Modulation Errors
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM PHAS to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.20
Frequency Error Absolute
Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time.
FREQ
_
ERR
FREQ
MEAS
FREQ
REF
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
Note that this measurement does not consider a possible carrier frequency offset. This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal.
This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation, but can also be used for the PSK/QAM modulations. However, since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the I/Q plane, in this case you might notice uncritical spikes.
This is due to the fact that the phase of zero (or a complex value close to zero) has in fact limited significance, but still influences the result of the current frequency measurement.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
92
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-15: Result display "Frequency Error Absolute" in normal mode
Available for source types:
● Modulation Errors
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM FREQ to define the result type (see
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.21
Frequency Error Relative
Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time.
The results are normalized to the symbol rate (PSK and QAM modulated signals), the estimated FSK deviation (FSK modulated signals) or one quarter of the symbol rate (MSK modulated signals).
FREQ
_
ERR
FREQ
MEAS
FREQ
REF
with t=n
·T
D
and T
D
=the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183).
This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation, but can
also be used for the PSK/QAM modulations. See also the note for Frequency Error
.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
93
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-16: Result display "Frequency Error Relative" in normal mode
Available for source types:
● Modulation Errors
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM FREQ to define the result type (see
DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
to define relative values (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:
TRAC:DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.22
Result Summary
Shows the Modulation Accuracy results in a table.
Depending on the modulation type you are using, the result summary shows different measurement results.
Details concerning the specific measurement results can be found in
chapter 7.1, "Formulae" , on page 358.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
94
R&S
®
FSV-K70
PSK, QAM and MSK modulation
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-17: Result summary display for "Modulation Accuracy"
If the result summary display is not given the entire screen width or height, only the infor-
available information is provided.
For more information see
chapter 7.1.2.1, "PSK, QAM and MSK Modulation" , on page 361.
The following results are displayed:
● *) EVM (Error Vector Magnitude) - RMS/Peak
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● MER (Modulation Error Ratio) - RMS/Peak
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) Phase Error - RMS/Peak
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● Magnitude Error - RMS/Peak
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) Carrier Frequency Error
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
95
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
● *) Rho
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) I/Q Offset
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● I/Q Imbalance
Not for BPSK.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) Gain Imbalance
Not for BPSK.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) Quadrature Error
Not for BPSK.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) Amplitude Droop
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● *) Power
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
For each result, the R&S
FSV calculates and shows various statistical values:
● Current value
● *) Mean value
To calculate the mean value, the R&S
FSV averages the number of results defined by the
● *) Peak value
● StdDev (standard deviation)
● 95%ile (95 percentile; only for continuous sweep or sweep count > 1)
Compared to the mean value, the 95%ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep, or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter.
● *) Unit
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
96
R&S
®
FSV-K70
FSK modulation
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
● Frequency Error - RMS/Peak
Shows the average (RMS) and peak frequency error in %. The frequency error is the difference of the measured frequency and the reference frequency.
The frequency error is normalized to the estimated FSK deviation.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● Magnitude Error - RMS/Peak
Shows the average (RMS) and peak magnitude error in %. The magnitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal.
The magnitude error is normalized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● FSK Deviation Error
Shows the deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz. The FSK deviation error is the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal and the FSK reference deviation you have set.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● FSK Meas Deviation
Shows the estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● FSK Ref Deviation
Shows the reference deviation you have set in Hz.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● Carrier Frequency Error
Shows the mean carrier frequency offset in Hz.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● Carrier Frequency Drift
Shows the mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
● Power
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
97
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Shows the power of the measured signal.
SCPI command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:
Basis of evaluation
The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the "Evaluation Range" (see
"Evaluation Range" on page 171). They are evaluated
according to the setting of the Display Points/Sym
parameter. For example, if "Display
Points/Symbol" is "1", only the symbol instants contribute to the result displayed in the result summary.
Table 3-1: Results calculated over the evaluation range
PSK, MSK, QAM FSK
EVM
MER
Phase Error
Magnitude Error
Rho
Power
Frequency Error
Magnitude Error
Power
The following results that are based on internal estimation algorithms (see
"Signal Model, Estimation and Modulation Errors" , on page 55) are calculated over the
"Estimation range" (see also
chapter 2.6.1.2, "Estimation" , on page 57).
Table 3-2: Results calculated over the estimation range
PSK, MSK, QAM FSK
Carrier Frequency Error
I/Q Offset
I/Q Imbalance
Gain Imbalance
Quadrature Error
Amplitude Droop
FSK Deviation Error
FSK Measurement Deviation
Carrier Frequency Error
Carrier Frequency Drift
Current value
In the "Current" column, the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed. For example, the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep (as indicated by marker 1 in
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
98
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-18: Example for result summary with current EVM peak value marked
If you want to compare the trace values to the results of the Result Summary, make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary. Refer to
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183 for details.
Mean value
In the "Mean" column, the linear mean of the values that are in the "Current" column is displayed. Note that if the values are in a logarithmic representation, e.g. the I/Q Offset, the linear values are averaged.
Peak value
In the "Peak" column, the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed. Note that when the value can be positive and negative, e.g. the phase error, the maximum absolute value (maintaining its sign) is displayed. The peak value of Rho is handled differently, since its minimum value represents the worst case. In that case, the minimum value is displayed.
Standard Deviation
The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then converted to the displayed unit.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
99
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
95-percentile
The 95-percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values. Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero, the
95-Percentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values. Again, the
Rho value is handled differently. Here, the 5-Percentile is displayed, since the lowest Rho value represents the worst case.
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'TCAP'
to define the required source type (see
TRAC:DATA to query the trace results (see
3.1.1.23
Bit Error Rate (BER)
A bit error rate (BER) measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits:
BER = error bits / number of analyzed bits
As a prerequisite for this measurement, the R&S
FSV-K70 application must know which bit sequences are correct, i.e. which bit sequences may occur. This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format, which is loaded in the
R&S
FSV-K70 (see chapter 3.3.7, "Working With Known Data Files" , on page 199).
If such a file is loaded in the application, the BER result display is available.
Available for source types:
● Modulation Accuracy
Note that this measurement may take some time, as each symbol decision must be compared to the possible data sequences one by one.
The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal. High
BER values indicate problems such as:
● inadequate demodulation settings
● poor quality in the source data
● false or missing sequences in the Known Data file
● result range alignment leads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequences
A BER value of 0.5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found.
See also
chapter 3.3.7.1, "Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data" , on page 199
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
100
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
The following information is provided in the BER result display (in full view):
● Bit Error Rate: error bits / number of analyzed bits
● Total # of Errors: number of detected bit errors (known data compared to symbol decisions)
● Total # of Bits: number of analyzed bits
For each of these results, the following values are provided:
BER Result
Current
Minimum
Maximum
Accumulative
Description
Value for current result range
Minimum "Current" value during the current measurement
Maximum "Current" value during the current measurement
Total value over several measurements; for BER: Total # of Errors / Total # of Bits (similar to average function)
SCPI commands:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC'
to define the required source type (see
CALC:FORM BER to define the result type (see
CALC:BER?
3.1.2 Normal (Time/Symbol) Displays
Normal displays show the results in the time domain or as symbols.
Table 3-3: Available time/symbol displays depending on source type
Source Type Result Type
Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute
Meas & Ref Signal
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Frequency Absolute
Vector I/Q
Magnitude Absolute
Magnitude Relative
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
101
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Source Type
Symbols
Error Vector
Modulation Errors
Modulation Accuracy
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Result Type
Phase Wrap
Phase Unwrap
Frequency Absolute
Frequency Relative
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Eye Diagram Real (I)
Eye Diagram Imag (Q)
Eye Diagram Frequency
Constellation I/Q
Constellation I/Q (Rotated)
Vector I/Q
Constellation Frequency
Vector Frequency
Binary
Octal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
EVM
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Vector I/Q
Magnitude Error
Phase Error
Frequency Error Absolute
Frequency Error Relative
Result Summary
Bit Error Rate (BER)
3.1.3 Spectral Displays
Spectral evaluations can be carried out for all result displays that show the time or symbols on the x-axis.
Note that the spectrum is only calculated over the evaluation range.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
102
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Table 3-4: Available spectral displays depending on source type
Source Type Result Type
Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute
Meas & Ref Signal
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Magnitude Absolute
Magnitude Relative
Phase Wrap
Phase Unwrap
Frequency Absolute
Error Vector
Modulation Errors
Frequency Relative
Real/Imag (I/Q)
EVM
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Magnitude Error
Phase Error
Frequency Error Absolute
Frequency Error Relative
For real input signals, the spectrum between the frequencies 0 and (symbol rate*capture oversampling/2) is displayed; for complex input signals (REAL/IMAG and Error REAL/
IMAG), the spectrum between +/- (symbol rate*capture oversampling/2) is displayed.
The input signal is subjected to a fast Fourier transformation (FFT) with 4096 points, and the magnitude is calculated and displayed. If the basic result display is too long, the total length is divided into several subblocks of 4096 points each and the results are averaged.
The subblocks overlap each other by 25% of the block length. In addition, the input signal or the subblocks are evaluated with a FLATTOP window.
If the valuation range is active, the FLATTOP window is also restricted to the area inside the evaluation lines. Following the FFT, the spectrum magnitude is calculated and displayed.
and
show examples of such spectral evaluations. The upper trace shows the basic diagram in each case, while the lower trace shows the associated spectral evaluations.
The top part of
figure 3-19 shows EVM versus time; the spectrum of the EVM signal is
shown at the bottom. In figure 3-20 , the FFT is applied to the complex signal (REAL/
IMAG, top). The bottom diagram shows the spectrum. Since the input signal is complex, a two-sided spectrum is shown. In both cases, the time range for the FFT is restricted by the activated evaluation lines so that, for example, burst edges are not included.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
103
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-19: Spectrum diagram: Single-sided display for real input signals
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
104
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-20: Spectrum diagram: Two-sided display for complex input signals
3.1.4 Statistical Displays
Statistical evaluations can be carried out for all result displays that show the time or symbols on the x-axis. They show the distribution (i.e. probabilities of occurrence) of the values as a set of bars.
Note that only samples within the evaluation range contribute to the statistic measurement.
In all statistical displays a vertical line shows the value of the 95% percentile.
Table 3-5: Available statistical displays depending on source type
Source Type Result Type
Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute
Meas & Ref Signal
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Magnitude Absolute
Magnitude Relative
Phase Wrap
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
105
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Source Type
Error Vector
Modulation Errors
Result Type
Phase Unwrap
Frequency Absolute
Frequency Relative
Real/Imag (I/Q)
EVM
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Magnitude Error
Phase Error
Frequency Error Absolute
Frequency Error Relative
For complex displays (REAL/IMAG and Error REAL/IMAG), a separate statistics diagram is calculated for the real and imaginary parts.
The input signal of the basic display is quantized and the probability of occurrence is shown by a bargraph. The quantization can be set via the number of bars in the display area by using the "Range > X-Axis Quantize" parameter (see
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117). In the basic setting, 101 bars are used.
shows an example of a statistical evaluation. The lower window (C) shows the basic diagram (EVM), while the upper window (A) shows the associated distribution of the EVM.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
106
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-21: Error vector magnitude (bottom), EVM distribution (top)
3.1.5 Displayed Measurement Settings
The channel bar above the result screens displays the most important measurement settings. Depending on the result type, the following information may be displayed in the channel bar:
Editing settings in the channel bar
Some settings that are displayed in the channel bar can easily be edited by touching the setting in the display (with a finger or mouse pointer). The corresponding (edit) dialog box is displayed in which you can edit the setting. For some settings, a context-sensitive menu is also available, see
chapter 3.2.14, "Available Context Menus" , on page 144.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
107
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Label
Ref Level
Offset
Att
Freq
Std
Mod
Res Len
Cap Len
SR
Input
SGL
Burst
Pattern
Stat Count
Capt Count
Description
Reference level, see "Reference Level" on page 116
Reference level offset, if defined, see "Ref Level Offset" on page 121
Attenuation, see
chapter 3.2.3, "SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu
Frequency, see
Digital standard, see "Digital Standards" on page 113
Modulation type, if no standard is active (or default standard is changed), see
Result Length, see
Capture Length (instead of result length for capture buffer display), see "Capture
Symbol Rate, see
Input type of the signal source, see chapter 3.2.12, "Softkeys of the Input/Output menu (R&S
Single sweep mode; cannot be edited directly
Burst search active (see
Pattern search active (see "Auto/On/Off" on page 165)
Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations, see "Statistics
Count" on page 123; cannot be edited directly
Capture count; the current number of captures performed if several captures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by "Statistics Count"; cannot be edited directly
For more information on general measurement settings displayed in the channel bar, see the description of basic operations in the base unit.
3.1.6 Result Ranges and Evaluation Ranges
The defined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays (where useful) to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces.
Result ranges
In some cases, the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand. For example, bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots. Thus, you can exclude them from the result range (see
chapter 3.3.2, "Defining the Result Range" , on page 186).
The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams.
Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition, the result ranges may be continuous or discrete. Bursted signals commonly have several discrete result ranges
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
108
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display at the bursts, with intervals during the noise periods which should not be included in the results.
Fig. 3-22: Result ranges for a burst signal
Continuous signals, on the other hand, have result ranges that cover the entire or a specific part of the capture buffer without intervals.
Fig. 3-23: Result ranges for a continuous signal
Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range, such as the EVM vs. Time display or the data in the "Current" column of the Result Summary. In this case, you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges (
softkey), and analyze the individual result ranges in another window. The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display.
Evaluation ranges
The result range in turn may contain more data than is necessary to calculate characteristic values.
For example, while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range, they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels. Thus, you would not include them in the evaluation range.
In all displays over time, except for capture buffer displays, the evaluation range is indicated by red lines.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
109
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
Fig. 3-24: Evaluation lines in absolute magnitude diagram
In symbol tables, the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets.
In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only, two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis.
3.1.7 Saving Measurement Results
After a data acquisition or measurement, you may like to save the results for further evaluation or documentation purposes. You can save a screenshot of the display to a file or print it, and you can export the trace data in ASCII format.
To print or store a screenshot
1. Press the PRINT key.
2. Press the "Device Setup" softkey.
3. To copy the screenshot to the clipboard or print it on a printer, select the corresponding option. Before you print to a printer, make sure a printer is installed (see the description in the base unit manual).
To save the screenshot to a file, select the file format for your screenshot (e.g.
JPEG) and then select the "Print to file" option.
4. Close the "Hardcopy Setup" dialog.
5. Press the "Colors" softkey and then "Select Print Color Set".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
110
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement Result Display
6. If you want the colors of your screenshot to be as they appear on the screen, select
"Screen Colors (Hardcopy)".
7. Press the PRINT key again and then press the "Print Screen" softkey.
8. If you selected "Print to file", a file selection dialog box is opened. Specify the file location for your screenshot and press "Save".
To store a screenshot via remote control
HCOP: DEV: LANG BMP
Selects the data format.
HCOP: DEST 'MMEM'
Directs the hardcopy to a file.
MMEM: NAME 'C: \R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp'
Selects the file name. If the file Print.bmp already exists, it is replaced.
HCOP
Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print.bmp.
To save the I/Q data to a file and reload it
You can store the captured I/Q data to a file and reload it on the instrument again later.
1. Select a window that displays I/Q data.
2. Press the SAVE/RCL hardkey and then the "Save" softkey.
3. Define a file name for the data file.
4. Select "IQ Data" from the list of items to be stored.
5. Press "Save" to close the dialog and store the data to the file.
6. To load the data again later, press the SAVE/RCL hardkey and then the "Load" softkey. Select the file name with the stored data (.dfl extension).
To export the trace data in ASCII format
The R&S
FSV can save your results as plain text in a text file.
1. Close all screens that are not relevant for your measurement results by disabling the
"Screen X active" option in the "Display Config" dialog (see also "Screen X active" on page 180).
2. Press the TRACE key.
3. Press the "ASCII Trace Export" softkey.
4. Specify the file location to store the data to.
5. Select the "Mode": Trace.
If you only want to save the I/Q samples of your capture buffer, select RAW.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
111
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
6. To include all your parameter settings select "Header": On.
7. Select the format of the "Decimal Separator" (3.1416 or 3,1416).
8. Press "Save".
To export the data via remote control
Example:
:SENSe1:DDEMod:PRESet 'GSM_NB'
Load GSM Normal Burst Standard.
:INITiate1:CONTinuous OFF
Switch to single sweep mode.
:INITiate1:IMMediate
Perform single sweep.
:TRACe4? TRACe1
Query the result symbols in screen D.
3.2 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
This chapter describes the softkeys available for the R&S
FSV-K70 option.
● Softkeys of the VSA menu (R&S
..........................................................112
Softkeys of the Frequency Menu (R&S
...............................................114
SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu (R&S
....................................115
Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu (R&S
...................................................121
Softkeys of the Sweep Menu (R&S
......................................................122
Softkeys of the Trace Menu (R&S
........................................................125
Softkeys of the Trigger Menu (R&S
......................................................128
Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu (R&S
.............................................131
Softkeys of the Marker Menu (R&S
......................................................132
Softkeys of the Marker To Menu (R&S
.................................................135
Softkeys of the Input/Output menu (R&S
.............................................140
Softkeys of the Save/Recall Menu (R&S
..............................................143
3.2.1 Softkeys of the VSA menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The VSA menu provides basic functions for vector signal analysis. For information on configuring VSA measurements, see
chapter 3.3, "Configuring VSA measurements" , on page 145.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
112
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
The following softkeys are available in the "VSA" and "MEAS" menus:
Settings Overview
Displays the main settings overview that visualizes the data flow of the Vector Signal
Analyzer and summarizes the current settings. In addition, the "Settings Overview" dialog box provides access to the individual settings dialog boxes and allows you to restore default values.
For details on configuring the measurement and a description of the individual dialog boxes, see
chapter 3.3.1, "Settings Overview" , on page 145.
Digital Standards
Opens a submenu and a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conventional mobile radio standards. See
Managing standard settings files
for details.
For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter 2.4, "Predefined
Standards and Settings" , on page 41.
Load Standard ← Digital Standards
Opens a file selection dialog to load a measurement settings file for a specific standard.
See
Managing standard settings files
for details.
Note: When you load a standard, the usage of a known data file, if available, is automatically deactivated.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PRESet[:STANdard]
Save As Standard ← Digital Standards
Opens a file selection dialog to save the current measurement settings as a file for a specific standard.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:SAVE
Delete Standard ← Digital Standards
Deletes the selected standard. Standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz can also be deleted. A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the standard.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
113
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Note: Restoring predefined standard files. The standards predefined by Rohde &
Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the "Restore Standards" softkey.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:DELete
Standard Defaults ← Digital Standards
Resets the instrument to the default settings of the currently used standard. If no standard is currently active, the previously active standard is used.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:PREset[:VALue]
Restore Standard Files ← Digital Standards
Restores the standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FACTory[:VALue]
New Folder ← Digital Standards
Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file.
This function is only available if the "Save Current Settings as Standard" dialog box is open.
Display Config
Opens the "Display Configuration" dialog box to configure the measurement results display. See
chapter 3.3.1.6, "Display Configuration" , on page 179.
Restore Factory Settings
Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery.
Restore Standard Files ← Restore Factory Settings
Restores the standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FACTory[:VALue]
Restore Pattern Files ← Restore Factory Settings
Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde&Schwarz available at the time of delivery.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FACTory[:VALue]
3.2.2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The FREQ key opens the "RF Settings" tab of the "Frontend & I/Q Capture Settings" dialog box and displays the "Frequency" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
114
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Center
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency.
Remote command:
Stepsize Auto/Man
Toggles between automatic step size or a fixed (manually defined) step size ( CF Stepsize
) for the center frequency.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO
CF Stepsize
Opens an edit dialog box to define the fixed step size for the center frequency. The softkey indicates the current setting.
This function is only available if "Stepsize Auto/Man" on page 115 is set to "Man".
Remote command:
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP
Frequency Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset.
The softkey indicates the current frequency offset. The allowed values range from
-100
GHz to 100 GHz. The default setting is 0 Hz.
Remote command:
3.2.3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
When you click the AMPT key, the "Amplitude" menu is displayed, which provides the following softkeys.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
115
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Reference Level
Defines the reference level in dBm.
The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly, which is indicated by the "IFOVL" status display.
To get an ideal reference level, use Auto Level function. For more information, see
●
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
Ranges
Opens a submenu to define the display range for normal or spectral displays (see "Result
Y-Axis Range ← Ranges
Opens an edit dialog field to define the y-axis range.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]
Y-Axis Reference Value ← Ranges
Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference value for the y-axis in the current unit.
The y-axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the
.
Note: The y-axis reference value is maintained even if the Y-Axis Range
is changed.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
116
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
For details see
chapter 3.3.3, "Changing the Display Scaling" , on page 189.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue
Y-Axis Reference Position ← Ranges
Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference position for the y-axis as a percentage value, where 0 % refers to the bottom edge, 100 % refers to the top edge of the screen.
The y-axis is adapted so that the Y-Axis Reference Value
is displayed at the reference position.
For details see
chapter 3.3.3, "Changing the Display Scaling" , on page 189.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition
Y-Axis Autorange ← Ranges
Adapts the y-axis to the current measurement results (only once, not dynamically) in the focussed window.
To adapt the range of all screens together, use the Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens function. For more information, see
●
"Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens" on page 122
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO[:VALue]
Ranges (statistic measurements)
Opens a submenu to define the display range for statistic displays (see
X-Axis Quantize ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph, i.e. the granularity of classifications.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:BCOunt
X-Axis Reference Value ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference value for the x-axis in the current unit.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue
X-Axis Range ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Opens an edit dialog field to define the x-axis range in the current unit.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
117
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
y-Axis Max Value ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range.
Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The y-
axis scaling is defined via the y-Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and min
value must be at least one decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer
y-Axis Min Value ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range. Values in the range 1e
-9
< value < 0.1 are allowed. The y-axis scaling is defined via the
Unit % / Abs softkey. The distance between max and min value must be at least one
decade.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer
y-Unit % / Abs ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Defines the scaling type of the y-axis. The default value is absolute scaling.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT
Default Settings ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Resets the x- and y-axis scalings to their preset values for the current measurement window.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet
Adjust Settings ← Ranges (statistic measurements)
Adjusts the x-axis scaling to the occurring statistical values.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO
Ranges (Symbol Table)
Opens a submenu to define the display mode for the symbol table.
Binary ← Ranges (Symbol Table)
Sets the symbol display to binary mode. This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row.
Octal ← Ranges (Symbol Table)
Sets the symbol display to octal mode. This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row.
Decimal ← Ranges (Symbol Table)
Sets the symbol display to decimal mode. This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
118
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Hexadecimal ← Ranges (Symbol Table)
Sets the symbol display to hexadecimal mode. This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row.
Units
Opens a submenu to define the units for the x- and y-axis.
X-Axis Unit ← Units
Opens an edit dialog field to define the x-axis unit as seconds or symbols.
Remote command:
Y-Axis Unit ← Units
Opens an edit dialog field to define the y-axis unit according to the displayed measurement type.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
Capture Unit ← Units
Defines the unit in which the data is captured: seconds or signals. The unit is also applied to the trigger offset and the grids of all active measurements.
Remote command:
Preamp On/Off
Switches the preamplifier on and off.
If option R&S
FSV-B22 is installed, the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz.
If option R&S
FSV-B24 is installed, the preamplifier is active for all frequencies.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
Remote command:
RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation, irrespective of the reference level. If electronic attenuation is activated (option R&S
FSV-B25 only; "El Atten Mode Auto" softkey), this setting defines the mechanical attenuation.
The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps.
The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps (with option R&S
FSV-B25: 1 dB steps). The range is specified in the data sheet. If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula: level mixer
= level input
– RF attenuation
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
119
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Note: As of firmware version 1.61, the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm. Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results, which are indicated by the "OVLD" status display. The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal, but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument!
Remote command:
RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto
Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level. This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used. It is the default setting.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
Remote command:
El Atten On/Off
This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off. This softkey is only available with option R&S
FSV-B25.
When the electronic attenuator is activated, the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately. Note however, that both parts must be defined in the same mode, i.e. either both manually, or both automatically.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
● To define the mechanical attenuation, use the
RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual
or
softkeys.
● To define the electronic attenuation, use the
softkey.
Note: This function is not available for stop frequencies (or center frequencies in zero span) >7 GHz. In this case, the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually. As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, this function is available again.
When the electronic attenuator is switched off, the corresponding RF attenuation mode
(auto/manual) is automatically activated.
Remote command:
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)
This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually. If manual mode is selected, an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value.
This softkey is only available with option R&S
FSV-B25, and only if the electronic attenuator has been activated via the
softkey.
Note: This function is not available for stop frequencies (or center frequencies in zero span) >7 GHz. In this case, the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually. As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz, electronic attenuation is available again. If the electronic attenuation was defined manually, it must be re-defined.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
120
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB. Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value.
To re-open the edit dialog box for manual value definition, select the "Man" mode again.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached" is output.
Remote command:
Ref Level Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit. The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
Input (AC/DC)
Toggles the RF input of the R&S
FSV between AC and DC coupling.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
Remote command:
3.2.4 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The AUTO SET displays the "Auto Set" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Auto Level
Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically.
The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the
Remote command:
Settings
Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling.
Possible settings are:
●
"Meas Time Manual" on page 122
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
121
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
●
Meas Time Manual ← Settings
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds. The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically (see the "Auto Level" softkey,
"Auto Level" on page 121). The default value is 1 ms.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation
Meas Time Auto ← Settings
The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically
softkey).
This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value depending on the signal description (see
"Signal Description" on page 150).
Upper Level Hysteresis ← Settings
Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer
Lower Level Hysteresis ← Settings
Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer
Y-Axis Autorange
Adapts the y-axis to the current measurement results (only once, not dynamically) in the focussed window.
To adapt the range of all screens together, use the Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens function. For more information, see
●
"Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens" on page 122
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO[:VALue]
Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens
Adapts the y-axis to the current measurement values (only once, not dynamically) in all measurement windows.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO:ALL
3.2.5 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The SWEEP key displays the "Sweep" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
122
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Continuous Sweep
Sets the continuous sweep mode: the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings. This is the default setting.
The trace averaging is determined by the
Remote command:
INIT:CONT ON, see
Single Sweep
Sets the single sweep mode: after triggering, starts the number of sweeps that are defined
by using the Statistic Count softkey. The measurement stops after the defined number
of sweeps has been performed.
Remote command:
INIT:CONT OFF, see
Continue Single Sweep
Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the
Statistic Count softkey, without deleting
the trace of the last measurement.
This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations "Average" or "Max
Hold" to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging/maximum search.
Remote command:
Refresh
Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data. This is useful after changing settings, for example filters, patterns or evaluation ranges.
Remote command:
Statistics Count
Opens a dialog box to define sweep characteristics. The behavior depends on whether you have set the R&S
FSV to single sweep mode or continuous sweep mode.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
123
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Activate "Description" to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings.
"Auto"
"Manual"
In single sweep mode: captures the I/Q data once and evaluates it
In continuous sweep mode: captures I/Q data continuously; for each evaluation, the average is calculated over the last 10 capture sets
(moving average)
In single sweep mode: captures I/Q data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed
In continuous sweep mode: captures I/Q data continuously; if trace averaging is selected, the average is calculated over the defined number of capture sets (moving average);
Note: If the "Statistic Count" is set to 1, trace averaging is not performed
(Max Hold and Min Hold, however, remain active, unlike in "Spectrum" mode).
Remote command:
[SENSe]:SWEep:COUNt[:VALue]
Select Result Rng
Opens an input field to select the result range you want to analyze.
By default, the R&S
FSV shows the results over all result ranges that have been captured in the data capturing process and are in the R&S
FSV's memory. By selecting a range number, you can analyze a specific result range, e.g. a particular burst.
The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously.
A selection of the result range is possible in single sweep mode only.
For more information refer also to
●
●
●
"Statistics Count" on page 123
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:MBURst:CALC
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
124
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
3.2.6 Softkeys of the Trace Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The TRACE key displays the "Trace" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Context-sensitive menus for traces
Traces have context-sensitive menus. If you right-click on a trace in the display or a trace setting in the information channel bar (or touch it for about 1 second), a menu is displayed which corresponds to the softkey functions available for traces.
Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
Selects the active trace (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) and opens the "Trace Mode" submenu for the selected trace. The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode, the other traces are switched off ("Blank" mode). Not all measurement functions support all 6 traces.
For details see
chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode Overview" , on page 205.
Tip: To configure several traces in one step, press the "Trace Wizard" softkey to open a trace configuration dialog. See also
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]
Clear Write ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE WRIT, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Max Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S
FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
125
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Min Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S
FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory.
This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible.
Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MINH, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Average ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
The average is formed over several sweeps. The Statistics Count
determines the number of averaging procedures.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE AVER, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
View ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, the instrument settings, apart from level range and reference level (see below), can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the
icon on the tab label.
If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S
FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE VIEW, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Blank ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
Hides the selected trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC OFF, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
126
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Evaluation (Meas/Ref) ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6
Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the reference signal (if "Meas & Ref Signal" is used as the signal source, see
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>[:VALue]
Trace Wizard
Opens the "Trace Wizard" dialog. For each trace you can define a "Trace Mode" and an
"Evaluation" type. Alternatively, you can configure several traces in one step using the predefined settings.
Trace Mode ← Trace Wizard
Defines the type of display and the evaluation of the trace.
● Clear Write
● Max Hold
● Min Hold
● Average
● View
● Blank
For details see
chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode Overview" , on page 205
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE
Evaluation ← Trace Wizard
Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the reference signal (if "Meas & Ref Signal" is used as the signal source, see
Remote command:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
127
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Preset All Traces ← Trace Wizard
Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step:
Trace 1: "Clear Write"
Trace 2-6: Blank
For details see (
chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode Overview" , on page 205).
Select Max | Avg | Min ← Trace Wizard
Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step:
Trace 1: "Max Hold"
Trace 2: "Average"
Trace 3: "Min Hold"
Trace 4-6: Blank
For details see (
chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode Overview" , on page 205).
Select Max | ClrWrite | Min ← Trace Wizard
Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step:
Trace 1: "Max Hold"
Trace 2: "Clear Write"
Trace 3: "Min Hold"
Trace 4-6: Blank
For details see (
chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode Overview" , on page 205).
ASCII Trace Export
Opens the "ASCII Trace Export" dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory. Various options are available to configure the stored data.
● "Mode"
Stores raw I/Q data or trace data
● "Header"
Includes a header with scaling information etc.
● "Decimal Separator"
Defines the separator for decimal values as point or comma
Remote command:
3.2.7 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The TRIG key opens the "I/Q Capture" tab of the "Frontend & I/Q Capture Settings" dialog box (see
chapter 3.3.1.2, "Frontend and I/Q Capture Settings" , on page 153) and dis-
plays the "Trigger" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
128
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Free Run
The start of a sweep is not triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IMM, see
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
External
Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the "EXT TRIG/GATE IN" input connector on the rear panel.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR EXT, see
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
IF Power/ Baseband Power
For this purpose, the R&S
FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate frequency.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A reference level offset, if defined, is also considered.
IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option
R&S
FSV-B160.
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type:
Sweep mode:
● RBW > 500 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 500 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
FFT mode:
● RBW > 20 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 20 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep types, the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting.
The R&S
FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected frequency (= start frequency in the frequency sweep).
For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S
FSV-B17), the baseband power
("BB Power") is used as the trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIG:SOUR IFP, see
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
TRIG:SOUR BBP for digital input
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
129
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Trigger Level
Defines the trigger level as a numeric value.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S
FSV-B17:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower
Trigger Polarity
Sets the polarity of the trigger source.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default setting is "Pos". The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the "Free Run" and
"Time" mode.
"Pos" Level triggering: the sweep is stopped by the logic "0" signal and restarted by the logical "1" signal after the gate delay time has elapsed.
"Neg" Edge triggering: the sweep is continued on a "0" to "1" transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe
Trigger Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep.
The time may be entered in s or in symbols.
offset > 0: offset < 0:
Start of the sweep is delayed
Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger)
Only possible for span = 0 (e.g. I/Q Analyzer mode) and gated trigger switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time: pretrigger max
= sweep time
When using the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) with I/Q Analyzer mode, the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples.
See the R&S Digital I/Q Interface(R&S
FSV-B17) description in the base unit.
In the "External" or "IF Power" trigger mode, a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay (trigger offset) as well.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]
Trigger Offset Unit
Toggles between symbols and seconds as the trigger offset unit.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
130
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
3.2.8 Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The "Meas Config" menu provides functions for measurement configuration.
Settings Overview
Displays the main settings overview that visualizes the data flow of the Vector Signal
Analyzer and summarizes the current settings. In addition, the "Settings Overview" dialog box provides access to the individual settings dialog boxes and allows you to restore default values.
For details on configuring the measurement and a description of the individual dialog boxes, see
chapter 3.3.1, "Settings Overview" , on page 145.
Modulation/Signal Description
Opens the "Modulation/Signal Description" dialog box.
The signal description of the expected input signal determines the available configuration settings and the available burst or pattern settings. You can define a pattern to which the result range can be aligned (see
A schematic preview of the current signal description is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
The "Modulation" tab contains modulation and Transmit filter settings. A live preview of the Constellation I/Q trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings.
For details on the available settings see "Modulation" on page 146 and
"Signal Description" on page 150.
Frontend
Displays the "Frontend" tab of the "Frontend & I/Q Capture Settings" dialog box.
A live preview of the signal with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
Note that this works only in continuous sweep mode.
For details on the available settings see
I/Q Capture
Displays the "I/Q Capture" tab of the "Frontend & I/Q Capture Settings" dialog box.
A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
Note that this works only in continuous sweep mode.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
131
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
For details on the available settings see
Config Pattern
Displays the "Advanced Pattern Settings" dialog box (see "Advanced Settings" on page 166).
Burst/Pattern Search
Displays the "Burst/Pattern Search" dialog box.
The "Burst Search" tab contains the settings for burst searches.
A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The green bar below the trace indicates the defined
evaluation ranges (see "Evaluation Range" on page 171). The preview area is not edit-
able directly.
The "Pattern Search" tab contains the settings for pattern searches.
For details on the available settings see
"Burst Search" on page 162 and
Range Settings
Displays the "Result Range" tab of the "Result Range/Evaluation Range" dialog box.
A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box.
For details on the available settings see
"Result Range" on page 169 and
Demod/ Meas Filter
Displays the "Demodulation & Measurement Filter" dialog box.
The "Demodulation" tab contains the settings for the demodulation.
The "Measurement Filter" tab contains the settings for the measurement filter.
A live preview of the Constellation I/Q trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
For details on the available settings see "Measurement Filter"
on page 178 and "Demodulation" on page 173.
Display Config
Opens the "Display Configuration" dialog box to configure the measurement results display. See
chapter 3.3.1.6, "Display Configuration" , on page 179.
3.2.9 Softkeys of the Marker Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The MARKER key displays the "Marker" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
132
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Marker 1/2/3/4
Selects the corresponding marker and activates it.
Marker 1 is always a normal marker. After Marker 2 to 4 have been switched on, they are delta markers that are referenced to Marker 1. These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value displays using the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey. When
Marker 1 is the active marker, pressing the "Marker Norm/Delta" softkey switches on an additional delta marker. Pressing the "Marker 1" to "Marker 4" softkey again switches the corresponding marker off.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?
Marker Norm/Delta
Changes the active marker to a normal (norm) or delta marker (with respect to marker
1).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe]
Couple Screens (On/Off)
Markers in all diagrams with the same (time or symbols) x-axis have coupled x-values
(except for capture buffer display), i.e. if you move the marker in one diagram, it is moved in all coupled diagrams.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
133
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Fig. 3-25: Coupled markers in screens A, B and D
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LINK
Link Mkr1 and Delta1
The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1, so if the x-axis value of the marker 1 is changed, the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x-position. The link is off by default.
You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference (e.g. between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK
Marker to Trace
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be placed.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
134
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
All Marker Off
Switches all markers off. It also switches off all functions and displays that are associated with the markers/delta markers.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF
3.2.10 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The MARKER -> key displays the "Marker To" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
Select 1/2/3/4/
∆
Selects the normal marker or the delta marker and activates the marker. "
∆" stands for delta marker 1.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]
Select Mkr and Trace
Opens the "Select Marker and Trace" tab of the "Marker To Settings" dialog box.
Marker ← Select Mkr and Trace
Enables and defines the setting for the individual markers. The marker value is defined
in the x-axis unit. The selected marker can be moved to a specific trace using the Move
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe]
Move Marker to Trace ← Select Mkr and Trace
Moves the marker selected under Marker to the trace selected here. The marker changes
to the selected trace, but remains on the previous symbol.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
135
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Search Settings
Opens the "Search Settings" tab of the "Marker To Settings" dialog box.
Search Direction ← Search Settings
Defines whether the absolute values are searched, or the values to the left (smaller) or to the right (greater).
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
Marker Real / Marker Imag ← Search Settings
Defines whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the "Real/Imag" measurement.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch
Search Limits ← Search Settings
If enabled, defines the limits of the search.
"Left Limit"
"Right Limit"
Lowest symbol number for which the search is performed.
Highest symbol number for which the search is performed.
"Use Zoom
Limits"
Restricts the marker search to the zoomed area.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT
Peak
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
Next Peak
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
Max |Peak|
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the largest absolute peak value (maximum or minimum) of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:APEak
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
136
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Min
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
Next Min
Sets the active marker/delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT
3.2.11 Setting Limits - Softkeys of the Lines Menu
The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Limits" menu which is displayed when you press the LINES key.
Tasks
●
chapter 3.3.8, "Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements" , on page 204
ModAcc Limits
Activates or deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result summary.
If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits, those values are indicated in red in the result summary table. If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits, the checked values are indicated in green.
For details on working with limits see
chapter 3.3.8, "Working with Limits for Modulation
Accuracy Measurements" , on page 204.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:STATe
Config ModAcc Limits
Opens a dialog to configure modulation accuracy limits for the result summary.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
137
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Note: The dialog box differs depending on the modulation type. For FSK modulation, different result types are available.
For details on configuring limits see chapter 3.3.8, "Working with Limits for Modulation
Accuracy Measurements" , on page 204.
Limit Checking ← Config ModAcc Limits
Activates or deactivates a limit check on the subsequent measurements.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:STATe
Set to Default ← Config ModAcc Limits
Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:DEFault
Current/Mean/Peak ← Config ModAcc Limits
Define and activate the limits for the currently measured value, the mean and the peak value on separate tabs. Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
138
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Limit Value ← Current/Mean/Peak ← Config ModAcc Limits
Define the limit with which the currently measured, mean or peak value is to be compared.
A different limit value can be defined for each result type. Depending on the modulation type, different result types are available.
Remote command Result type
PSK, MSK, QAM:
EVM RMS
EVM Peak
Phase Err Rms
Phase Err Peak
Magnitude Err Rms
Magnitude Err Peak
Carr Freq Err
Rho
IQ Offset
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RCURrent:VALue on page 222
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PCURrent:VALue on page 222
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RCURrent:VALue on page 224
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PCURrent:VALue on page 224
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:CURRent:VALue on page 221
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:CURRent:VALue
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:CURRent:VALue on page 224
FSK modulation only:
Freq Err Rms
Freq Err Peak
Magnitude Err Rms
Magnitude Err Peak
FSK Dev Err
Carr Freq Err
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PCURrent:VALue on page 223
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:CURRent:VALue on page 221
Check ← Current/Mean/Peak ← Config ModAcc Limits
Considers the defined limit value in the limit check, if checking is activated.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:<ResultType>:<LimitType>:STATe on page 219
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
139
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
3.2.12 Softkeys of the Input/Output menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The INPUT/OUTPUT key displays the "In-/Output" menu, which contains the following softkeys.
└ Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level ..................................................141
Signal Source
Opens a dialog box to select the signal source.
For "Digital Baseband (I/Q)", the source can also be configured here.
Input Path ← Signal Source
Defines whether the "RF Radio Frequency" or the "Digital IQ" input path is used for measurements. "Digital IQ" is only available if option R&S
FSV-B17 (R&S Digital I/Q
Interface) is installed.
Note: Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal, which differ significantly between the RF input and digital input.
Remote command:
Connected Device ← Signal Source
Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface
(R&S
FSV-B17) to provide Digital IQ input. The device name cannot be changed here.
The device name is unknown.
Remote command:
Input Sample Rate ← Signal Source
Defines the sample rate of the digital I/Q signal source. This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device, e.g. a generator.
Remote command:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
140
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Full Scale Level ← Signal Source
The "Full Scale Level" defines the level that should correspond to an I/Q sample with the magnitude "1".
The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt.
Remote command:
Level Unit ← Signal Source
Defines the unit used for the full scale level.
Remote command:
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]:UNIT
Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level ← Signal Source
If enabled, the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs.
Remote command:
EXIQ
Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly.
Note: The EX-IQ-Box functionality is not supported for R&S
FSV models 1321.3008Kxx.
If the optional R&S DigIConf software is installed, the submenu consists only of one key to access the software. Note that R&S DigIConf requires a USB connection (not
LAN!) from the R&S
FSV to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in addition to the R&S Digital I/Q
Interface connection. R&S DigIConf version 2.10 or higher is required.
For typical applications of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX see also the description of the R&S Digital
I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) in the base unit manual.
For details on configuration see the "R&S®Ex I/Q Box - External Signal Interface Module
Manual".
For details on installation and operation of the R&S DigIConf software, see the "R&S®EX-
IQ-BOX Digital Interface Module R&S®DigIConf Software Operating Manual".
TX Settings ← EXIQ
Opens the "EX-IQ-BOX Settings" dialog box to configure the R&S
FSV for digital output to a connected device ("Transmitter" Type).
RX Settings ← EXIQ
Opens the "EX-IQ-BOX Settings" dialog box to configure the R&S
FSV for digital input from a connected device ("Receiver" Type).
Send To ← EXIQ
The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
141
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Firmware Update ← EXIQ
If a firmware update for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is delivered with the R&S
FSV firmware, this function is available. In this case, when you select the softkey, the firmware update is performed.
R&S Support ← EXIQ
Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors.
This data is stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user\Support directory on the instrument.
The SupportSave.dfl file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later. (Remember to set the sweep mode to "Single Sweep" beforehand, as "Continuous Sweep" would immediately overwrite the loaded input data.)
If you contact the Rohde&Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
DigIConf ← EXIQ
Starts the optional R&S DigIConf application. This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed.
To return to the R&S
FSV application, press any key on the front panel. The application is displayed with the "EXIQ" menu, regardless of which key was pressed.
For details on the R&S DigIConf application, see the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Digital Interface
Module R&S®DigIConf Software Operating Manual".
Note: If you close the R&S DigIConf window using the "Close" icon, the window is minimized, not closed.
If you select the "File > Exit" menu item in the R&S DigIConf window, the application is closed. Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX-IQ-BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the "DigIConf" softkey in the
R&S
FSV once again.
Remote command:
Remote commands for the R&S DigIConf software always begin with SOURce:EBOX.
Such commands are passed on from the R&S
FSV to the R&S DigIConf automatically which then configures the R&S EX-IQ-BOX via the USB connection.
All remote commands available for configuration via the R&S DigIConf software are described in the "R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Digital Interface Module R&S®DigIConf Software
Operating Manual".
Example 1:
SOURce:EBOX:*RST
SOURce:EBOX:*IDN?
Result:
"Rohde&Schwarz,DigIConf,02.05.436 Build 47"
Example 2:
SOURce:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:FREQuency 5MHZ
Defines the frequency value of the reference clock.
Input (AC/DC)
Toggles the RF input of the R&S
FSV between AC and DC coupling.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
142
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
Remote command:
Digital IQ Info
Displays a dialog box with information on the digital I/Q input and output connection via the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17), if available. The information includes:
● Device identification
● Used port
● (Maximum) digital input/output sample rates and maximum digital input/output transfer rates
● Status of the connection protocol
● Status of the PRBS descewing test
For details see "Interface Status Information" in "Instrument Functions - R&S Digital I/Q
Interface (Option R&S
FSV-B17)" in the description of the base unit.
Remote command:
3.2.13 Softkeys of the Save/Recall Menu (R&S
FSV-K70)
The "Save/Recall" menu contains the same functions as for the base unit, except for the
"Export" submenu:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
143
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis (R&S
FSV-K70)
Export
Opens a dialog box to configure exports of trace data.
ASCII Trace Export ← Export
Opens the "ASCII Trace Export" dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory. Various options are available to configure the stored data.
● "Mode"
Stores raw I/Q data or trace data
● "Header"
Includes a header with scaling information etc.
● "Decimal Separator"
Defines the separator for decimal values as point or comma
Remote command:
IQ Export ← Export
Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored.
This function is only available in single sweep mode.
For details see the description in the base unit ("Importing and Exporting I/Q Data").
Remote command:
R&S Support ← Export
Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors.
This data is stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user\Support directory on the instrument.
The SupportSave.dfl file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later. (Remember to set the sweep mode to "Single Sweep" beforehand, as "Continuous Sweep" would immediately overwrite the loaded input data.)
If you contact the Rohde&Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
3.2.14 Available Context Menus
For many objects on the screen, context-sensitive menues are available that provide helpful functions for the specific object, e.g. an edit dialog box for a specific setting. Thus,
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
144
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements you don't have to navigate through various softkey levels or dialog boxes to quickly change a setting.
There are two ways to access the context menus:
● Right-click the object to display the menu temporarily and select the required function directly.
● Double-click the object to display a context-sensitive softkey menu that remains visible until you click a hardkey with its own menu.
Example:
For example, the context-sensitive menu for the symbol rate display in the information bar at the top of the screen provides a function to change the symbol rate directly. Alternatively, you could select "Home > Modulation" and then the "Symbol Rate" input field.
3.3 Configuring VSA measurements
Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using predefined standard setting files, or independently of digital standards using user-defined measurement settings. Such settings can be stored for recurrent use.
Thus, configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks:
● Selecting an existing standard settings file and, if necessary, adapting the measurement settings to your specific requirements.
● Configuring the measurement settings and, if necessary, storing the settings in a file.
● Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements ...............................204
3.3.1 Settings Overview
An overview of the current and required settings is available using the "Settings Over-
view" softkey in the "VSA" menu (see "Settings Overview" on page 113).
The overview visualizes the data flow in the Vector Signal Analyzer, summarizes the current settings and provides a convenient way to configure all measurement settings.
From the overview you can access the individual settings dialog boxes by clicking the required topic. For details on the displayed information, see the description of the individual dialog boxes below.
To reset the instrument to the default settings of the default standard, click "Set to
Default".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
145
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
3.3.1.1
Modulation and Signal Description Settings
You describe the properties of the signal to be measured in the "Modulation and Signal
Description Settings" dialog box. This dialog box is displayed when you select "Modulation / Signal Description" in the "Settings Overview".
The dialog box contains the following tabs:
●
●
"Signal Description" on page 150
●
Modulation
The "Modulation" tab of the "Modulation & Signal Description" dialog box contains modulation and Transmit filter settings. A live preview of the Constellation I/Qtrace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings. The preview area is not editable directly.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
146
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Modulation Type
Defines the modulation type of the vector signal. The following types are available:
● PSK
● MSK
● QAM
● FSK
● UserQAM
Remote command:
Modulation Order
Depending on the
Modulation Type , various orders of modulation are available:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
147
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Type
PSK
MSK
QAM
FSK
UserQAM
8FSK
2ary
4ary
16ary
32ary
Pi/4-16QAM
32QAM
-Pi/4-32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
2FSK
4FSK
Available orders
BPSK
QPSK
Offset QPSK
DQPSK
3Pi/4-QPSK
Pi/4-DQPSK
8PSK
D8PSK
3Pi/8-8PSK
Pi/8-D8PSK
Pi/4-QPSK
MSK
DMSK
16QAM
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat
FSK Ref Deviation
The FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
148
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
In case of 2FSK, it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive / negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK, the distance to the outer positive/ negative deviation frequency.
Select "Relative" from the dropdown menu next to the input field to set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate (x*SR). If you want to set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz, select "Absolute" from the dropdown menu.
Note that this parameter is available only in combination with FSK modulated signals.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence[:VALue]
CALCulate<n>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence:RELative
Modulation Mapping
The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type
and
.
For more information on the modulation mapping, refer to
●
chapter 2.3, "Symbol Mapping" , on page 21
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MAPPing[:VALue]
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MAPPing:CATalog?
Symbol Rate
The symbol rate also determines the I/Q bandwidth of the data recording and demodulation. You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz.
For details on the possible values see table 2-1 .
Remote command:
Transmit filter Type
Defines the type of transmit filter
An overview of available Transmit filters is provided in table 2-3
.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:NAME
To define the name of the Transmit filter to be used.
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter[:STATe]
To switch off the Transmit filter.
Load User Filter ← Transmit filter Type
Opens a file-selection dialog box to select the user-defined Transmit filter to be used.
Note: If a user-defined Transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined
automatically (see "Auto" on page 179), a Low-ISI measurement filter according to the
selected user filter is calculated and used.
For details see
chapter 2.2.7, "Customized Filters" , on page 19.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:NAME
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
149
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Alpha/BT
Defines the roll-off factor (Alpha) or the filter bandwidth (BT).
The roll-off factor and filter bandwidth for Transmit filter is available for RC, RRC, Gauss and GMSK filter.
The roll-off factor and filter bandwidth for measurement filter is available for RRC filter.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa
Measurement filter:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:ALPHa
Signal Description
The settings in the "Signal Description" tab of the "Modulation & Signal Description" dialog box describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for
configuration. You can define a Pattern
to which the instrument can be synchronized, thus adapting the result range.
A graphical preview of the current Signal Description configuration is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
150
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Continuous Signal / Burst Signal
Determines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts. For bursts, further settings are available.
Parameter
Min Length
Max Length
Run-In
Run-Out
Description
Shortest expected burst length in symbols
Longest expected burst length in symbols (
≦15000)
The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modulated symbols
The number of symbols before the falling edge that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation
Note:
The burst excluding its Run-In/-Out areas is sometimes referrred to as the "useful part".
The minimum length of the useful part (= Min Length - Run-In - Run-Out) must be
≧10.
The parameter Run-In/-Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized. The (internal) synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run-In/-Out areas. Hence, this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations, e.g. Bluetooth, because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SIGNal[:VALue]
Pattern
If enabled, the instrument expects the signal to contain a pattern.
Note: The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the "Pattern Search Set-
tings", see "Auto/On/Off" on page 165. By default, the pattern search is active if the signal
description contains a pattern.
This function cannot be enabled if the signal description does not contain a pattern.
Select the pattern from the selection list. To change the pattern settings, press "Advanced
Settings" on page 166. For details on working with pattern searches, see
"Working with Pattern Searches" , on page 194
Further pattern settings are located in the "Pattern Search" on page 164 dialog box (see
chapter 3.3.1.3, "Burst and Pattern Search Settings" , on page 162).
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SIGNal:PATTern
Pattern Settings
Displays the "Advanced Pattern Settings" dialog box (see "Advanced Settings" on page 166).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
151
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Offset
The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst
(see also the note in "Continuous Signal / Burst Signal" on page 151). If the position of
the pattern within the burst is known, it is recommended that you define the offset. That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:SYNC:OFFSet:STATe
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:SYNC:OFFSet[:VALue]
Known Data
In the "Known Data" tab of the "Modulation & Signal Description" dialog box you can load
a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal (see chapter 3.3.7,
"Working With Known Data Files" , on page 199).
Additional information provided by the loaded file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box. This information is not editable directly.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
152
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Known Data
Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file (if available). When deactivated, the additional information from the previously loaded data file is removed. Any references to the known data in the "Demodulation" dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values (see
Note: When a standard is loaded, the use of a Known Data file is automatically deactivated.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:KDATa:STATe
Load Data File
If
is activated, this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data. Once a file has been selected, any additional information provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:KDATa[:NAME]
3.3.1.2
Frontend and I/Q Capture Settings
You configure the measurement of the actual input signal in the "Frontend and I/Q Capture Settings" dialog box. This dialog box contains the following tabs:
●
●
Frontend
The "Frontend" tab contains the frontend settings of the instrument.
A live preview of the signal with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
153
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Frequency
Defines the center frequency. The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span.
span > 0: span min
/2 ≤ f center
≤ f max
– span min
/2 span = 0: 0 Hz ≤ f center
≤ f max f max
and span min
are specified in the data sheet.
Remote command:
Reference Level
Defines the reference level in dBm.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
154
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value. Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly, which is indicated by the "IFOVL" status display.
To get an ideal reference level, use Auto Level function. For more information, see
●
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
Ref Level Offset
Defines the arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit. Where necessary, the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly.
The setting range is ±200 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
Preamp On/Off
Switches the preamplifier on and off.
If option R&S
FSV-B22 is installed, the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz.
If option R&S
FSV-B24 is installed, the preamplifier is active for all frequencies.
This function is not available for input from the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17).
Remote command:
Input Coupling
Toggles the RF input of the R&S
FSV between AC and DC coupling.
Remote command:
Attenuation Mode
Toggles the attunuation mode. In automatic mode, the RF attenuation is automatically set as a function of the selected reference level. This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used. It is the default setting.
In manual mode, the specified RF attenuation is used irrespective of the reference level
(see "RF Attenuation" on page 155).
Remote command:
RF Attenuation
For
= "Manual", this value defines the attenuation irrespective of the reference level. If electronic attenuation is enabled (option R&S
FSV-B25 only;
= "Auto"), this setting defines the mechanical attenuation.
The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
155
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps (with option R&S
FSV-B25: 1 dB steps). The range is specified in the data sheet. If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly.
Note: Values under 10 dB can only be entered via the numeric keypad or via remote control command in order to protect the input mixer against overload.
The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula:
"level mixer
= level input
– RF attenuation"
The maximum mixer level allowed is -10 dBm. Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results, which are indicated by the "OVLD" status display.
Remote command:
El Attenuation ON/OFF
Enables and defines the electric attenuation. The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB. Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached" is output.
Remote command:
I/Q Capture
The "I/Q Capture" tab contains the settings for the measured I/Q data.
Note that the maximum usable I/Q bandwidth for the R&S
FSV40 with the order number
1307.9002K39 is 10
MHz. Therefore the maximum symbol rate for this model is
≤3.125 MHz (capture oversampling = 4), ≤1.5625 MHz (capture oversampling = 8),
≤0.78125 MHz (capture oversampling = 16) and ≤0.390625 MHz (capture oversampling
= 32).
A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
156
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Capture Length Auto
Defines the Capture Length automatically according to the burst and pattern length set-
tings and the statistics count (see "Signal Description" on page 150). Thus, a minimal
Capture Length is used, which improves performance.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:RLENgth:AUTO
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
157
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Capture Length
Defines the capture length in symbols or seconds, if not defined automatically (
).
The sample rate and the usable I/Q bandwidth are displayed for reference only.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:RLENgth[:VALue]
Capture Oversampling
Sets the oversampling rate, i.e the number of captured points per symbol. The default value is 4.
This parameter affects the demodulation bandwidth. If the bandwidth is too narrow, the signal is not displayed completely. If the bandwidth is too wide, interference from outside the actual signal to be measured can distort the result. Thus, for signals with a large frequency spectrum (e.g. FSK modulated signals), a higher capture oversampling rate may be necessary.
For an indication of the required capture oversampling value, view the "Real/Imag (I/
Q)" display of the Capture Buffer with a "Spectrum" transformation. If the complete signal is displayed and fills the width of the display, the selected value is suitable. If the signal is cut off, increase the oversampling rate; if it is too small, decrease the oversampling value.
Fig. 3-26: Determining the I/Q bandwidth: Real/Imag (I/Q) display of the Capture Buffer with a Spectrum transformation
Remote command:
Sample Rate
Shows the current sample rate.
Note that this is a read only field.
Usable I/Q Bandwidth
Shows the usable I/Q bandwidth.
Note that this is a read only field.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
158
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Maximum Bandwidth
Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R&S
FSV for I/Q data acquisition
This function is only available if the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160 is installed and no other restrictions for its use apply (see
chapter 2.2.2.1, "Restrictions" , on page 14).
For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 2.2, "Filters and Bandwidths During
Signal Processing" , on page 11.
"Auto"
"40 MHz"
(Default) The maximum available bandwidth is used for all sample rates.
If the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160 is installed, it is also
activated (if no other restrictions for its use apply, see chapter 2.2.2.1,
Thus, sample rates up to 1.28 GHz and an I/Q bandwidth up to 160
MHz are possible.
Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spurious effects.
Deactivates use of the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160, thus reducing possible spurious effects, while restricting the analysis bandwidth to 40
MHz.
Sample rates higher than 128
MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth extension.
Remote command:
Swap I/Q
Swaps the I and Q values of the signal. Swapping I and Q inverts the sideband.
"ON"
"OFF"
I and Q are exchanged, inverted sideband, Q+j*I
Normal sideband, I+j*Q
Remote command:
Trigger Mode
Defines the trigger mode.
"External" Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the "EXT TRIG/GATE IN" input connector on the rear panel.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
159
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
"IF Power"
For this purpose, the R&S
FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate frequency.
The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification. A reference level offset, if defined, is also considered.
IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160.
For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet.
The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type:
Sweep mode:
● RBW > 500 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 500 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
FFT mode:
● RBW > 20 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal
● RBW ≤ 20 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal
Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep types, the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same
RBW setting.
The R&S
FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected frequency (= start frequency in the frequency sweep).
"Free Run" The start of a sweep is not triggered. Once a measurement is completed, another is started immediately.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower
For digital input:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower
Trigger Offset
Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep.
The time may be entered in s or in symbols.
offset > 0: offset < 0:
Start of the sweep is delayed
Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger)
Only possible for span = 0 (e.g. I/Q Analyzer mode) and gated trigger switched off
Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time: pretrigger max
= sweep time
When using the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) with I/Q Analyzer mode, the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples.
See the R&S Digital I/Q Interface(R&S
FSV-B17) description in the base unit.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
160
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
In the "External" or "IF Power" trigger mode, a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate. Therefore, changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay (trigger offset) as well.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME]
Trigger Level
Defines the trigger level as a numeric value.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S
FSV-B17:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower
Trigger Polarity
Sets the polarity of the trigger source.
The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal. The default setting is "Pos". The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the "Free Run" and
"Time" mode.
"Pos" Level triggering: the sweep is stopped by the logic "0" signal and restarted by the logical "1" signal after the gate delay time has elapsed.
"Neg" Edge triggering: the sweep is continued on a "0" to "1" transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe
Trigger Hysteresis
Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for "IF power" or "RF Power" trigger sources.
The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement. The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis
Trigger Holdoff
Defines the value for the trigger holdoff. The holdoff value in s is the time which must pass before triggering, in case another trigger event happens.
This softkey is only available if "IFPower", "RF Power" or "BBPower" is the selected trigger source.
Remote command:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff
For digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S
FSV-B17:
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
161
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
3.3.1.3
Burst and Pattern Search Settings
You configure burst and pattern searches in the "Burst & Pattern Settings" dialog. This dialog box contains the following tabs:
●
●
Burst Search
The "Burst Search" tab contains the settings for burst searches. In addition, it contains a
link to the "Signal Description" settings (see "Signal Description" on page 150).
A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The green bar below the trace indicates the defined
evaluation range (see "Evaluation Range" on page 171). The preview area is not editable
directly.
The "Burst Search" tab is also displayed when you select the "Burst Search" softkey in
the "Meas Config" menu (see "Burst/Pattern Search" on page 132).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
162
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Auto/On/Off
Enables or disables burst searches. If "Auto" is selected, burst search is enabled only if
"Bursted Signal" is selected in the "Signal Description" tab of the "Modulation & Signal
Description" dialog box (see
"Continuous Signal / Burst Signal" on page 151).
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:AUTO
Meas only if burst was found
If enabled, measurement results are only displayed (and are only averaged) if a valid burst has been found. For measurements of burst signals that are averaged over several sweeps, this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:MODE
Auto Configuration
Configures the burst search automatically. If enabled, the Search Tolerance and Min Gap
Length settings are not available.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:CONFigure:AUTO
Search Tolerance ← Auto Configuration
Defines the number of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection. A search tolerance of 5, for example, with a minimum and maximum burst length of 100, will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long.
Note that due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length, there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm. Thus, setting this parameter to "0" will result in a failed burst search for most signals.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:TOLerance
Min Gap Length ← Auto Configuration
Represents the minimum distance (in symbols) between adjacent bursts. The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other. However, in case the capture buffer does not contain bursts that are narrowly Modulation Orderd, it is recommended to increase the value. This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
163
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search. It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement. For example, setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that are more narrowly Modulation Orderd.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:GLENgth[:MINimum]
Pattern Search
The "Pattern Search" tab contains the settings for pattern searches. In addition, it contains a link to the "Signal Description" settings (see
"Signal Description" on page 150).
For details on pattern searches, see
chapter 3.3.5, "Working with Pattern Searches" , on page 194.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
164
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Auto/On/Off
Enables or disables pattern searches. If "Auto" is selected, pattern search is enabled automatically if "Pattern" is selected in the "Signal Description" tab of the "Modulation &
Signal Description" dialog box (see "Pattern" on page 151).
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MODE
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:AUTO
Meas only if pattern symbols correct
If enabled, measurement results are only displayed (and averaged) if a valid pattern has been found. For measurements of signals with patterns that are averaged over several sweeps, this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MODE
Auto Configuration
Configures the pattern search automatically. If enabled, the
setting is not available.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:CONFigure:AUTO
I/Q Correlation Threshold ← Auto Configuration
The I/Q correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pattern
search (see also chapter 3.3.5, "Working with Pattern Searches" , on page 194). If the
parameter is set to 100%, only I/Q patterns that match totally with the input signal are found. This is only the case for infinite SNR.
The default value is 90%. As long as the pattern is found, there is no need to change this parameter. However, if the pattern is very short (approximately < 10 symbols) or if the signal is highly distorted, tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to succeed.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:IQCThreshold
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
165
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Select Pattern for Search
Determines which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is to be searched for. Only one pattern can be selected at a time. However, to check for several patterns in the same captured signal, select the single sweep mode (Statistic Count = 0 or 1) and change the pattern. The measurement is updated.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect
Advanced Settings
The "Advanced Pattern Settings" dialog box lists the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard. You can add existing patterns to the standard, remove patterns already assigned to the standard, edit existing or define new patterns. For details on managing standard patterns, see
chapter 3.3.6, "Managing patterns" , on page 196.
Note: Pattern details. Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right-hand side of the dialog box. You can refer to these details, for example, when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the correct one.
Prefix ← Advanced Settings
Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix.
Show Compatible ← Advanced Settings
Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
166
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Show All ← Advanced Settings
Shows all patterns, regardless of the selected standard.
Pattern Search On ← Advanced Settings
If enabled, the instrument can adapt its result range to the selected pattern.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe
Meas only if pattern symbols correct ← Advanced Settings
If enabled, measurement results are only displayed (and averaged) if a valid pattern has been found. For measurements of signals with patterns that are averaged over several sweeps, this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MODE
Add to Standard ← Advanced Settings
Adds the selected patterns to the list of available patterns ("Standard Patterns").
For details see
"To add a predefined pattern to a standard" on page 196.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern:ADD
Remove from Standard ← Advanced Settings
Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard. The patterns are removed from the "Standard Patterns" list, but not deleted.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern:REMove
Edit ← Advanced Settings
For details on defining a pattern, see
example "Defining a pattern" on page 197.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:TEXT
New ← Advanced Settings
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
167
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
For details on defining a pattern, see
example "Defining a pattern" on page 197.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:TEXT
Delete ← Advanced Settings
Deletes the selected patterns. Any existing assignments to other standards are removed.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete
Pattern Definition
The settings in the "Pattern" dialog box define the pattern.
Fig. 3-27: Pattern definition
For details on defining a pattern, see
example "Defining a pattern" on page 197.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
168
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Name
Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME
Description
Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:TEXT
Mod. order
The order of modulation, e.g. 8 for an 8-PSK.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NSTate
Symbol format
Hexadecimal, decimal or binary format
Symbols
Pattern definition, consisting of one or more symbols
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA
Comment
Optional comment for the pattern, displayed in the pattern details (kept for compatibility with FSQ)
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent
3.3.1.4
Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings
You configure the result range and evaluation range settings in the "Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range" dialog box. This dialog box contains the following tabs:
●
●
"Evaluation Range" on page 171
Result Range
The "Result Range" tab contains the settings for the result range. The result range determines which part of the capture buffer, burst or pattern is displayed. For more information,
see chapter 3.3.2, "Defining the Result Range" , on page 186 .
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
169
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box.
The "Result Range" tab is also displayed when you select the "Range Settings" softkey
in the "Meas Config" menu (see "Range Settings" on page 132).
Fig. 3-28: Result Range Alignment
Result Length
Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated. All traces over time are displayed over the result range. For example, if you have a burst of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols, you can examine the burst ramps in detail (by selecting the alignment "Burst - Center").
The maximum result length depends on the CPU board (indicated in "SETUP > System
Info > Hardware Info"):
FMR-7: 10000 symbols
FMR-9: 20000 symbols
Remote command:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
170
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Reference
Defines the reference for the result range alignment.
The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box.
"Capture" the capture buffer
"Burst"
"Pattern" the detected burst the detected pattern
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>:ADJust[:VALue]
Alignment
Defines the type of alignment of the result range to the reference source. The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>:ADJust:ALIGnment[:DEFault]
Offset
Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment reference. The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box.
Note: Note the following restrictions to this parameter:
● An offset < 0 is not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer.
● An offset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed. For example, if you align the result to the left border of the pattern, only offsets
≦ 0 are allowed.
Otherwise, you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>:ADJust:ALIGnment:OFFSet
Symbol Number at <Reference> start
Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment reference source (burst, capture or pattern).
In effect, this setting defines an offset of the x-axis (in addition to the one defined for the
Signal Description, see
For example, if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the "Symbol Number at <Reference> start" to "0", you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM measurement simply by moving a marker to the symbol number "0".
Note: If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst in the signal description (see
"Offset" on page 152) and align the result to the pattern, the
Symbol Number at <Reference> start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst, not the first symbol of the pattern.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:VOFFset
Evaluation Range
In the "Evaluation Range" tab you define which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it. The calculated length of the
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
171
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements specified range is indicated beneath the entries. The selected evaluation range is displayed in the visualization area.
A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box.
Entire Result Range
If enabled, the entire result range is evaluated.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ELIN<startstop>:STATe
Start
Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started. The start symbol itself is included in the evaluation range.
Note: Note that the start value is defined with respect to the x-axis including an optional offset defined via the
Symbol Number at <Reference> start
parameter.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ELIN<startstop>[:VALue]
Stop
Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is stopped. The stop symbol itself is included in the evaluation range.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
172
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Note: Note that the stop value is defined with respect to the x-axis including an optional offset defined via the
Symbol Number at <Reference> start
parameter.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:ELIN<startstop>[:VALue]
3.3.1.5
Demodulation and Measurement Filter Settings
You configure the demodulation and measurement filter settings in the "Demodulation &
Measurement Filter" dialog box. This dialog box contains the following tabs:
●
●
"Measurement Filter" on page 178
Demodulation
The "Demodulation" tab contains the settings for the demodulation.
A live preview of the trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
173
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
For FSK modulation, the dialog has slightly different options.
Compensate for...
If enabled, compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodulation.
Note: Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values.
For PSK, QAM, MSK modulation:
● "I/Q Offset"
● "I/Q Imbalance"
● "Amplitude Droop"
For FSK modulation:
● "FSK Deviation Error"
● "Carrier Frequency Drift"
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
174
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Example:
The following figures compare the results for a compensated I/Q offset of 2.5% and a non-compensated offset.
I/Q Offset compensated for I/Q Offset NOT compensated for
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:ADRoop
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:IQIMbalance
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:IQOFfset
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:CFDRift
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:FDERror
Normalize EVM to
Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value.
This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation.
● Max Ref Power
Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants.
● Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants.
● Mean Constellation Power
Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants
● Max Constellation Power
The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:ECALc[:MODE]
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
175
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Offset EVM
The offset EVM is only available for Offset QPSK modulated signals.
Unlike QPSK modulation, the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the I component in the time domain. The symbol time instants of the I and the Q component therefore do not coincide.
The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector.
It affects the EVM, Real/Imag and Vector I/Q result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary (EVM and MER).
You can select the way the R&S
FSV calculates the error vector results.
If "Offset EVM" is inactive, the R&S
FSV substracts the measured signal from the reference signal to calculate the error vector. This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period: one that corresponds to the I component and one that corresponds to the Q component.
If "Offset EVM" is active however, the R&S
FSV compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the I component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector. That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period.
Estimation Points/Sym
The estimation points per symbol affect and control synchronization of the signal. You can set the estimation points manually or let the R&S
FSV decide which estimation points to use.
If you define the estimation points manually, you can set the estimation points to 1 or 2
per symbol or the value of the Capture Oversampling per symbol. Setting the estimation
points to "1" means that the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account, while setting the estimation points to "Capture Oversampling" means that all sample time instants are weighted equally.
If you select the automatic routine, the R&S
FSV uses 2 estimation points per symbol for
Offset QPSK modulation and 1 estimation point per symbol for other PSK and QAM modulated signals. For MSK and FSK modulated signals the estimation points correspond to the capture oversampling.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:EPRate:AUTO
[SENSe]:DDEMod:EPRate[:VALue]
Coarse Synchronization
It is not only possible to check whether the pattern is part of the signal, but also to use the pattern for synchronization, in order to obtain the correct reference signal. Depending on the signal, making use of the pattern for synchronization speeds up your measurement considerably and makes it more robust against high carrier frequency offsets. However, in case the parameter is set to "Pattern", you should make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization, e.g. a pattern that was made for synchronization purposes like in
GSM. In case the pattern is short or the pattern does not have good synchronization properties, e.g. a pattern that consists of only one symbol that is repeated, this parameter should be set to "Data".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
176
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Note: In previous versions of the R&S
FSV-K70 application this setting was referred to as "Use Pattern For Sync". The former setting "True" corresponds to the new setting
"Pattern". The former setting "False" corresponds to the new setting "Data".
If "Auto" mode is selected, the detected data is used.
"Data" (Default): the detected data is used for synchronization, i.e. unknown symbols
"Pattern" Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:SYNC:AUTO
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:SYNC[:STATe]
Fine Synchronization
In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions, a fine synchronization is available to calculate various results from the reference signal, e.g. the EVM.
However, when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level, false symbol decisions are more frequent, which may cause spikes in the
EVM results. To improve these calculations the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area that includes a known symbol sequence in the input signal. In this case, the results for the limited reference area are more precise, at the cost of less accurate results outside this area. Thus, the result range should be set to the length of the reference area. The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file. If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal, the detected data is used by default.
If "Auto" mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use, the known data sequences are used. Otherwise, the detected data is used.
Note: You can define a maximum symbol error rate (SER) for the known data in reference to the analyzed data. If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit, the default synchronization using the detected data is performed.
"Known Data" The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded
Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data.
"Pattern"
"Detected
Data"
The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern.
(Default) The reference signal is estimated from the detected data.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc[:MODE]
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc:RESult?
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
177
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
If SER
≤
This setting is only available if "Known Data" is selected for "Fine Synchronization". You can define a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data. Thus, if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable, it is not used for synchronization. Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted. If the
SER of the known data exceeds this limit, the default synchronization using the detected data is performed.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc:LEVel
Measurement Filter
The "Measurement Filter" tab contains the settings for the measurement filter. In addition, a link to the "Modulation Settings" tab of the "Modulation and Signal Description Settings" dialog box is provided (see
A live preview of the trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box. The preview area is not editable directly.
For details on measurement filters see chapter 2.2.6, "Measurement Filters" , on page 17.
The "Measurement Filter" tab is also displayed when you select the "Demod/ Meas Filter" softkey in the "Meas Config" menu (see
"Demod/ Meas Filter" on page 132).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
178
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Auto
The measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the Transmit filter specified
Note: If a user-defined Transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically, a Low-ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is calculated and used.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:AUTO
Type
Defines the measurement filter type, if the
An overview of available measurement filters is provided in table 2-4 .
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter[:STATe]
To turn off the measurement filter.
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:NAME
To define the name of the measurement filter.
Load User Filter ← Type
Opens a file-selection dialog box to select the user-defined measurement filter to be used.
For details see
chapter 2.2.7, "Customized Filters" , on page 19.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:NAME
Alpha/BT
Defines the roll-off factor (Alpha) or the filter bandwidth (BT).
The roll-off factor and filter bandwidth for Transmit filter is available for RC, RRC, Gauss and GMSK filter.
The roll-off factor and filter bandwidth for measurement filter is available for RRC filter.
Remote command:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa
Measurement filter:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:ALPHa
3.3.1.6
Display Configuration
You configure the display for the results in the "Display Configuration" dialog box. This dialog box contains the following tabs:
● "Screen A-D": a separate tab for each of the four available screens
● "Predefined": for predefined display configurations
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
179
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
For more information, see
chapter 3.1, "Measurement Result Display" , on page 73.
The "Display Configuration" tab is also displayed when you select the MEAS key.
Screen A-D
For each of the four available screens you can configure what is to be displayed.
Screen X active
If enabled, the screen the tab corresponds to is displayed. If fewer than 4 screens are enabled, the remaining screens are enlarged to make best use of the available display.
Remote command:
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
180
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Highlight Symbols
If enabled, the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the screen for measured and reference signals in time (normal) display, as well as error displays.
Not all measurements support this function.
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol
Source
You can choose which signal source is to be displayed from the following options:
Source
Capture Buffer
Meas & Ref
Symbols
Description
The captured I/Q data
The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal (or both)
The detected symbols (i.e. the detected bits)
Error Vector The difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal:
Modulation (measurement signal - reference signal)
For example: EVM = Mag(meas - ref)
Modulation Errors Modulation errors due to different complex samples in the measurement and the reference signal:
Modulation (measurement signal) - Modulation (reference signal)
For example: Magnitude Error = Mag(meas) - Mag(ref)
Modulation Accuracy
Category for measurements that provide a summary on the modulation accuracy (e.g.
the Result Summary)
Remote command:
Result Type
Defines how the signal source is evaluated and which result is displayed. The available result types depend on the selected source type.
For more information, see
chapter 3.1.1, "Result types" , on page 75.
Table 3-6: Available result types depending on source type
Source Type Result Type
Capture Buffer
Meas & Ref Signal
Magnitude Absolute
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Frequency Absolute
Vector I/Q
Magnitude Absolute
Magnitude Relative
Phase Wrap
Phase Unwrap
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
181
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Source Type
Symbols
Error Vector
Modulation Errors
Modulation Accuracy
Result Type
Frequency Absolute
Frequency Relative
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Eye Diagram Real (I)
Eye Diagram Imag (Q)
Eye Diagram Frequency
Constellation I/Q
Vector I/Q
Constellation Frequency
Vector Frequency
Binary
Octal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
EVM
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Vector I/Q
Magnitude Error
Phase Error
Frequency Error Absolute
Frequency Error Relative
Result Summary
Remote command:
Result Type Transformation
The result type transformation parameters set the evaluation method of the measurement results.
These settings are not available for the following source types (see
● Symbols
● Modulation Accuracy
For more information, see
chapter 3.1, "Measurement Result Display" , on page 73.
"Normal"
"Spectrum"
X-axis displays time values.
X-axis displays frequency values.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
182
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
"Statistics" X-axis displays former y-values. Y-axis displays statistical information:
● Trace 1: the probability of occurrence of a certain value is plotted against the value
● Trace 2: the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value.
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:DDEM:SPECtrum[:STATe]
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe]
Display Points/Sym
Sets the number of display points that are displayed per symbol. If more points per symbol
are selected than the given Capture Oversampling
rate, the additional points are interpolated for the display. The more points are displayed per symbol, the more detailed the trace becomes.
Note: If the Capture Buffer is used as the signal source, the
rate defines the number of displayed points per symbol; the "Display Points/Sym" parameter is not available.
If "Auto" is enabled, the Capture Oversampling
value is used.
Alternatively, select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually. The available values depend on the source type.
For the Result Summary, the number of display points corresponds to the Estimation
Points/Sym . (By default, 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the capture over-
sampling rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals.) This value also controls which samples are considered for the Peak and RMS values and the Power result.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
183
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Fig. 3-29: Result display with different numbers of points per symbol: Screen A = 1; Screen B = 2; Screen
C = 4; Screen D = 16;
Remote command:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:PRATe[:VALue]
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:PRATe:AUTO
Oversampling
Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation. This setting is only available for the
Result Type Transformation "Statistics".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
184
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Fig. 3-30: Statistics measurement: Screen C: measured signal (symbols highlighted); Screen A: statistics for all trace points; Screen B: statistics for symbol instants only
"Symbols only" Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only
See screen B in
Statistics measurement: Screen C: measured signal
(symbols highlighted); Screen A: statistics for all trace points; Screen
B: statistics for symbol instants only .
"Infinite" Statistics are calculated for all trace points (symbol instants and intermediate times)
See screen A in
Statistics measurement: Screen C: measured signal
(symbols highlighted); Screen A: statistics for all trace points; Screen
B: statistics for symbol instants only .
"auto" currently not used
Remote command:
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:MODE
Predefined
You can store and load predefined screen configurations. All available configurations are displayed in the "Predefined" tab. The current screen configuration is indicated under
"Current" at the top of the list.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
185
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Add
Opens an edit dialog box to enter a name for the current screen configuration. The configuration is then stored and added to the list.
Apply
Applies the currently selected configuration from the list to the current display.
Remove
Removes the currently selected configuration from the list.
Restore
Restores the default Display Configuration. Existing settings with the default names are replaced.
3.3.2 Defining the Result Range
You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed ("Result Range") with reference to the captured data, a found burst or a found pattern.
You configure the result range and evaluation range settings in the "Result Range and
Evaluation Range" dialog box in the "Settings Overview" (see also chapter 3.3.1.4,
"Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings" , on page 169).
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
186
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
1. Define the "Result Length", i.e. the number of symbols from the result that are to be
analyzed (see "Result Length" on page 170.
Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference, the "Result Length" specified here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml
2. Define the "Reference" for the result range, i.e. the source to which the result will be aligned (see
"Reference" on page 171). The reference can be the captured data, a
detected burst or a detected pattern.
3. Define the "Alignment" of the result range to the reference source, i.e. whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source, ends with the reference source, or is centered with the reference source (see
4. Optionally, define an offset of the result range to the reference source, e.g. to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data (see
5. Optionally, define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the refer-
see
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
187
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Example: Defining the result range
Fig. 3-31: Example: Defining the Result Range
In figure 3-31 , a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buffer,
starting at the second symbol, which has the symbol number 1 (the capture buffer starts at symbol number 1, the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset: 1+1=2).
The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays, see
chapter 3.1.6, "Result Ranges and Evaluation Ranges" , on page 108.
Defining an Evaluation Range
By default, the entire result range is used for evaluation. If necessary, you can define an evaluation range that differs from the result range. For example, you can exclude the ramps of a burst for evaluation. The used evaluation range is indicated in the result display. For details see
"Evaluation Range" on page 171.
Remote control
In order to define the result range via remote control, use the following commands:
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TIME 100
//Defines the result length as 100 symbols.
CALC:TRAC:ADJ TRIG
//Defines the capture buffer as the reference for the result range
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
188
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
CALC:TRAC:ADJ:ALIG LEFT
//Aligns the result range to the left edge of the capture buffer
CALC:TRAC:ADJ:ALIG:OFFS 1
//Defines an offset of 1 symbol from the capture buffer start
DISP:TRAC:X:VOFF 1
//Defines the symbol number 1 as the capture buffer start
3.3.3 Changing the Display Scaling
Depending on the type of display (time, spectrum or statistics), various scaling functions are available to adapt the result display to the current data. Scaling functions are located
3.3.3.1
Scaling Time and Spectrum Diagrams
The range of the displayed y-axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways:
● manually, by defining the range size, reference values and positions
● automatically, according to the current results
To define the scaling manually using a reference point
With this method, you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y-axis.
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Y-Axis Reference Value" (see "Y-Axis Reference Value" on page 116).
3. Enter a reference value for the y-axis in the current unit.
4. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Y-Axis Reference Position" (see
"Y-Axis Reference Position" on page 117).
5. Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y-axis. The position is a percentage of the entire length, where 100 % refers to the top edge.
6. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Y-Axis Range" (see
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
189
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Example:
If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95%, you can define the y-axis range as 5
% and position the y-axis to start at 95%. To do so, enter the reference value 95 % and the reference position 0%.
Fig. 3-32: Defining the y-axis scaling using a reference point
To define the scaling automatically
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Y-Axis Autorange" (see
chapter 3.2.3, "SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu (R&S
The y-axis is adapted to display the current results optimally (only once, not dynamically).
3.3.3.2
Scaling Statistics Diagrams
Statistic diagrams show the distribution (i.e. probabilities of occurrence) of the values as a set of bars. You can define the number of bars to be displayed, i.e. the granularity of classifications. Additionally, you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed. For statistics measurements, both the x-axis and the y-axis can be scaled to optimize the display.
The range of the displayed x-axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following ways:
● manually, be defining a range in dB
● manually, by defining reference values and positions
● automatically, according to the current results
The range of the displayed y-axis can be defined in the following ways:
● manually, by defining the minimum and maximum values to be displayed
● automatically, according to the current results
After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
190
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
To define the number of bars
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > X-Axis Quantize" (see
"X-Axis Quantize" on page 117).
3. Enter the number of bars to be displayed.
The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars.
To define the scaling manually using a reference point
With this method, you define a reference value on the x-axis. The y-axis is adapted so that it crosses the x-axis at the reference value.
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > X-Axis Reference Value" (see "X-Axis Reference Value" on page 117).
3. Enter a reference value on the x-axis in the current unit.
The y-axis is adapted so that it crosses the x-axis at the reference value.
Example:
If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 %, enter the reference value 95 %.
Fig. 3-33: Defining the x-axis scaling using a reference point
To define the x-axis range manually
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > X-Axis Range" (see
3. Enter the range in the current unit.
The diagram is adapted to display the probabilities for the specified range.
To define the scaling automatically
1. Focus the result screen.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
191
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Adjust Settings" (see
"Adjust Settings" on page 118).
The x-axis is adapted to display the current results optimally (only once, not dynamically).
To define the y-axis range manually
With this method, you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range.
Values on the y-axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1.0. The y-
axis scaling is defined via the "y-Unit %/Abs" softkey (see "y-Unit % / Abs" on page 118).
If the y-axis has logarithmic scale, the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade.
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Y-Axis Min Value" (see
"y-Axis Min Value" on page 118).
3. Enter the lower limit in the current unit.
4. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Y-Axis Max Value" (see
"y-Axis Max Value" on page 118).
5. Enter the upper limit in the current unit.
The y-axis is adapted to display the specified range. Probabilities of occurrence located outside the display area are applied to the bars at the left or right borders of the display.
To restore the default scaling settings
1. Focus the result screen.
2. Select "AMPT > Ranges > Default Settings" (see "Default Settings" on page 118).
The x- and y-axis scalings are reset to their default values.
3.3.4 Managing standard settings files
Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA option. In addition, you can create your own settings files for user-specific measurements.
For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter 2.4, "Predefined
Standards and Settings" , on page 41.
To load predefined settings files
1. In the "VSA > Digital Standards" menu, select "Load Standard".
2. In the file selection dialog box, select the standard whose settings you want to load.
To change the path, press the arrow icons at the right end of the "Path" field and select the required folder from the file system.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
192
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
3. Press the "Select" button.
The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard.
To store settings as a standard file
This task can also be performed by remote control (see
1. Configure the measurement as required. See
2. In the "VSA > Digital Standards" menu, select "Save As Standard".
3. In the "File Name" field, enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings.
To change the path, press the arrow icons at the right end of the "Path" field and select the required folder from the file system.
To insert a new folder, click the "New Folder" softkey and enter a name in the "New
Folder" dialog box.
4. Press the "Save" button.
The dialog box is closed and the current measurement settings are stored in a standard file.
To delete standard files
1. In the "Digital Standards" file selection dialog box, select the standard whose settings file you want to delete. Standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz can also be deleted.
To change the path, press the arrow icons at the right end of the "Path" field and select the required folder from the file system.
2. Press the "Select" button.
3. Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard.
The standard file is removed from the folder.
To restore standard files
► In the "VSA > Digital Standards" menu, select "Restore Standard Files".
The standards predefined by Rohde & Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder.
To restore default standard settings
If you change predefined standard settings for a specific measurement, you may want to return to the default settings later.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
193
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
This task can also be performed by remote control (see
► In the "VSA > Digital Standards" menu, select "Standard Defaults".
The instrument is reset to the default settings of the standard last used.
3.3.5 Working with Pattern Searches
Patterns provide a fixed sequence of symbols at a defined point in time in the symbol stream. They are used in many digital mobile radio systems to evaluate the channel impulse response and to facilitate a demodulation in the receiver.
The pattern search is performed on the I/Q capture buffer. The R&S
FSV-K70 takes the symbol numbers of the pattern, modulates the pattern according to the Transmit filter and the modulation and, subsequently, searches the I/Q capture buffer for this I/Q pattern.
The K70 option can then adapt its result range to this pattern.
Predefined Patterns
Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists with standard specific patterns.
Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list. This list can be extended by patterns that are already available in the instrument. Newly created patterns can also be added to the list.
Pattern Settings
To configure a pattern search
Configuring a pattern search requires the following steps:
1.
This may require further subtasks: a)
Changing the display for the list of patterns
b)
Adding a pattern to a standard
c)
d)
2.
(if "Auto" mode is disabled)
3. Optionally,
search.
To add a pattern to the signal description
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Select the "Pattern" option.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
194
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
To select a predefined pattern for a search
This task can also be performed by remote control, see
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect on page 310.
Depending on whether a dialog box is already displayed, there are different ways to select a pattern:
1. If the "Settings Overview" dialog box is displayed, select "Signal Description".
From the "Name" selection list, select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard.
2. If the "Burst & Pattern Settings" dialog box is displayed, select the "Pattern Search" tab and select the pattern from the list of assigned patterns.
3. If the "Advanced Pattern Settings" dialog box is displayed, select the required pattern from the "Standard Patterns" list.
4. Otherwise, from the "VSA" menu, select "Signal Description".
From the "Name" selection list, select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard.
To enable a pattern search
This task can also be performed by remote control, see
1. If the "Advanced Pattern Settings" dialog box is already displayed, select the "Pattern
Search On" option.
Otherwise, in the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Pattern Search".
2. Select "On" to enable the search globally, or "Auto" to enable a search if a pattern is part of the signal description (see
"To add a pattern to the signal description" on page 194).
The selected pattern is used for a pattern search.
3. Optionally, select the "Meas only if pattern symbols correct" option. In this case, measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has been found. See also
"Meas only if pattern symbols correct" on page 165.
To define an offset for the pattern search
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Select the "Offset" option and enter the number of symbols to be used as an offset.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
195
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
3.3.6 Managing patterns
The available patterns and those assigned to the current standard are listed in the
"Pattern Settings" dialog box. In addition, details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed in the upper right-hand part of the dialog box. To show the details for a specific pattern, simply click on it.
To add a predefined pattern to a standard
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Press "Pattern Settings".
3. In the list of "All Patterns", select the required pattern.
4. Press "Add to Standard".
The selected pattern is inserted in the list of "Standard Patterns".
To change the display for the list of patterns
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Press "Pattern Settings".
3. To display all available patterns, select "Show All".
To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard, select "Show
Compatible".
To display only patterns that contain a specific prefix, enter the "Prefix" in the edit field.
To create a new pattern
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Press "Pattern Settings".
3. Press "New Pattern".
The pattern definition dialog box is displayed.
4. Define the following pattern settings:
Setting
Name
Description
Modulation order
Symbol format
Symbols
Comment
Description
Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list
Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details
Number of values each symbol can represent (order of modulation)
Hexadecimal or decimal format
Pattern definition, consisting of one or more symbols
Optional comment for the pattern, displayed in the pattern details (kept for compatibility with FSQ)
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
196
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
To define the pattern, proceed as follows: a) If necessary, add a new symbol field by pressing "Add".
b) Select the symbol field you want to define.
c) Enter a value using the keyboard. Depending on the "Modulation Order", the value can be in the range 0 to n-1, where n is the "Modulation Order", e.g. 8 for
8-PSK.
d) Select the next symbol field, or insert a new one, and continue to define the other symbols. To scroll through the fields for long patterns, use the scrollbar beneath the input area. The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indicates the sequential number of the last symbol field, the number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field.
To remove a symbol field, select it and press "Remove".
Example: Defining a pattern
Fig. 3-34: Pattern definition
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
197
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
This task can also be performed by remote control.
Example:
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'TETRA_SA', see
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NST 4, see
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA
'00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001', see
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:COMM '' , see
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:TEXT 'Special Continuous Downlink Burst',
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:TEXT
To edit a predefined pattern
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Press "Pattern Settings".
3. Select the pattern from the list of "All Patterns".
4. Press "Edit Pattern".
5. Change the settings as required as described in
"To create a new pattern" on page 196.
To delete a predefined pattern
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" dialog box, select "Signal Description".
2. Press "Pattern Settings".
3. Select the pattern from the list of "All Patterns".
4. Press "Delete Pattern".
The pattern is removed from the list of available patterns and can no longer be assigned to any standard. Any existing assignments to other standards are removed, as well.
To remove a predefined pattern from a standard
1. In the "VSA > Settings Overview" menu, select "Signal Description".
2. Press "Pattern Settings".
3. Select the pattern from the list of "Standard Patterns".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
198
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
4. Press "Remove from Standard".
The pattern is deleted and removed from the list of "Standard Patterns", but is still available for assignment from the list of "All Patterns".
3.3.7 Working With Known Data Files
For various vector signal analysis functions the measured signal is compared to a defined ideal reference signal. The more precise the reference signal, the more precise the results become. In the best case, the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to. This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range. Thus, a falsely estimated reference signal
(due to false symbol decisions) is avoided and does not influence the error calculation.
As of firmware version R&S
FSV 1.70, you can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the R&S
FSV-K70 application and use them to compare the measured data to. In particular, you can use known data for the following functions:
● Fine synchronization during the demodulation process (see figure 2-41
and "Demodulation" on page 173)
● Calculation of the Bit Error Rate (BER), see chapter 3.1.1.23, "Bit Error Rate
3.3.7.1
Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data
When you use Known Data files as a reference, some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply.
Modulation Order
The "Modulation Order" selected in the "Modulation" settings in the R&S
FSV-K70 application must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file (<ModulationOrder> element).
Demodulation
Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measurement duration, as each detected symbol must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file.
Result Length
The "Result Length" specified in the "Result Range" dialog box in the R&S
FSV-K70 application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file (<ResultLength> element).
Result Range Alignment
● Bursted signals
When you align the result range to a bursted signal, due to the uncertainty of the burst search, the determined result range might start up to 2 symbols before or after the
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
199
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements actual burst. However, an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data file will be found. To avoid this, try one of the following:
– Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst.
– Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer.
This requires a very precise trigger timing, otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again.
● Continuous signals
For continuous signals without a pattern, the result range is aligned randomly. Thus, a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined.
Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer. This requires a very precise trigger timing, otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again.
3.3.7.2
How to Load Known Data Files
Known Data files are loaded in the "Modulation & Signal Description" settings.
To load an existing Known Data file
1. In the "Settings Overview", select "Modulation / Signal Description".
2. Switch to the "Known Data" tab.
3. Activate the usage of a Known Data file by selecting the "Known Data" option. This enables the "Load Data File" function.
4. Select the "Load Data File" button.
A file selection dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal.
The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter 3.3.7.4, "Reference: Known
Data File Syntax Description" , on page 202.
The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box.
Once a Known Data file has been loaded, the Bit Error Rate result display becomes available.
If the "Fine Synchronization" setting in the "Demodulation" dialog box is set to
"Auto" mode, the known data is also used for synchronization. Otherwise it can be selected manually. Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for synchronization (see also
3.3.7.3
How to Create Known Data Files
You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequences of the input signal. Use any xml editing tool you like, following the rules described in
chapter 3.3.7.4, "Reference: Known Data File Syntax Description" , on page 202. Before
loading the file to the R&S
FSV-K70 application, make sure the syntax of your file is valid.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
200
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files
An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the
R&S
FSV-K70 application is provided on the instrument free of charge.
To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences
1. Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the
R&S
FSV-K70 application. If necessary, adapt the demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained.
2. Execute the file RecordingToolforSequences.EXE from the installation directory on the instrument.
The "R&S Recording Tool for Sequences" window is displayed.
3. Start a measurement in the R&S
FSV-K70 application.
4. In the tool window, select "Run".
The tool records the demodulated data sequences. The following result information is provided by the tool during recording:
● Analyzed Sequences: number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started
● Different Sequences: number of unique sequences detected in the measured data
● Last New Sequence Found: time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was found
● Throughput: current data processing speed of the tool
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
201
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Note that while the tool is running, the R&S
FSV is set to remote mode, i.e. the manual interface is not available. As soon as the tool is closed, the remote mode is automatically deactivated.
5. When all known possible sequences have been found, or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be found, stop the tool by selecting "Stop".
6. ● If the results are acceptable, select "Store for K70" to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrument.
A file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage location and file name.
You can also add an optional comment to the file.
● Otherwise, reset the tool to start a new recording, possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data.
7. Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the R&S
FSV-K70 application.
The created xml file can now be loaded in the R&S
FSV-K70 application as described in
chapter 3.3.7.2, "How to Load Known Data Files" , on page 200.
3.3.7.4
Reference: Known Data File Syntax Description
When you load a Known Data file, the R&S
FSV-K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax:
Table 3-7: Known Data File Syntax
Syntax Possible Values Description
as specified File Header <RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE
Version="01.00">
<Comment></Comment>
<Base></Base> arbitrary
2 | 16
<ModulationOrder></Modulation-
Order>
<ResultLength></ResultLength>
2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 32 | 64 | 128 |
256
1 ... up to 2000
*)
Optional file description
The base used to specify the <Data> values (binary or hexadecimal)
For <ModulationOrder> values
≥32, use binary (2).
Number of values each symbol can represent (order of modulation), e.g. 8 for 8-PSK
For <ModulationOrder> values
≥32, use <Base> = 2.
Number of symbols in each <Data> element
The number must be identical to the "Result Length" setting in the "Result Range" dialog box, i.e. the number of symbols to be demodulated.
*)
the exact number also depends on available memory space
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
202
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
Syntax Possible Values Description
<Data></Data> One character per symbol in the sequence
Possible characters are:
0 to n-1, where n is the
<ModulationOrder>
Spaces, tabs and line breaks are ignored
One possible sequence of symbols that can be demodulated from the input signal
Up to 6000
*)
different sequences, i.e. <Data>-elements, can be defined in total
</RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE> as specified File End
*)
the exact number also depends on available memory space
Sample xml file for known data
<RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE Version="01.00">
<Comment> Standard EDGE_8PSK </Comment>
<Base> 16 </Base>
<ModulationOrder> 8 </ModulationOrder>
<ResultLength> 148 </ResultLength>
<Data> 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607
770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522
177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615
527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344
241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 677 7 </Data>
<Data> 77 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607
770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522
177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615
527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344
241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 677 7 7 </Data>
<Data> 7 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607
770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522
177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615
527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344
241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 677 7 77 </Data>
<Data> 7 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607
770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522
177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615
527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344
241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 677 </Data>
<Data> 77 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607
770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522
177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615
527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
203
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Configuring VSA measurements
241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 </Data>
</RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE>
3.3.8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements
The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically. If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits, those values are indicated in red in the result summary table. If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits, the checked values are indicated in green.
Limits and the limit check are configured in the "Limits" dialog box that is displayed when
you press the "Config ModAcc Limits" softkey in the "Lines" menu (see "Config ModAcc
To define a limit check
1. Configure a measurement with "Modulation Accuracy" as the "Source" (in the
2. Press the LINES key on the front panel.
3. Press the "Config ModAcc Limits" softkey in the "Limits" menu.
4. In the "Current" tab, define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types.
Note: the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa. However, the limit check can be activated individually for current or peak values.
5. Select the "Check" option for each result type to be included in the limit check.
6. If necessary, define limits and activate the limit check for the mean values of the different result types on the "Mean" tab.
7. If necessary, activate the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the "Peak" tab.
8. To reset the limits to their default values, press "Set to Default".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
204
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Further Information
9. Select the "Limit Checking On" option, or press the "ModAcc Limits On" softkey in the "Limits" menu.
The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy measurement results and for all subsequent measurements until it is deactivated. The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result summary.
3.4 Further Information
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.1 Trace Mode Overview
The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement. Traces that are not activated are hidden. Each time the trace mode is changed, the selected trace memory is cleared.
The R&S
FSV provides the following different trace modes:
Clear Write
Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. This is the default setting.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE WRIT, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Max Hold
The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S
FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one.
This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals. The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MAXH, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Min Hold
The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The
R&S
FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory.
This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible.
Noise, interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
205
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Further Information
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE MINH, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Average
The average is formed over several sweeps. The Statistics Count
determines the number of averaging procedures.
This mode is not available for statistics measurements.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE AVER, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
View
The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed.
Note: If a trace is frozen, the instrument settings, apart from level range and reference level (see below), can be changed without impact on the displayed trace. The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the
icon on the tab label.
If the level range or reference level is changed, the R&S
FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range. This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC:MODE VIEW, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE on page 260
Blank
Hides the selected trace.
Remote command:
DISP:TRAC OFF, see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]
3.4.2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data
The data of the file header consist of three columns, each separated by a semicolon: parameter name; numeric value; basic unit. The data section starts with the keyword
"Trace <n>" (<n> = number of stored trace), followed by the measured data in one or several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semicolon.
Table 3-8: ASCII file format for VSA trace data export
File contents Description
Header
Type;FSV;
Version;1.45;
Date;01.Apr 2010;
Instrument model
Firmware version
Date of data set storage
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
206
R&S
®
FSV-K70
File contents
Screen;A;
Points per Symbol;4; x Axis Start;-13;sym; x Axis Stop;135;sym;
Ref value y axis;-10.00;dBm;
Ref value position;100;%;
Data section
Trace;1;
Meas;Result;
Meas Signal;Magnitude;
Demodulator;Offset QPSK;
ResultMode;Trace; x unit;sym; y unit;dBm;
Trace Mode;Clear Write;
Values;691;
10000;-10.3;-15.7
10130;-11.5;-16.9
10360;-12.0;-17.4
...;...;
Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis
Further Information
Description
Instrument mode
Points per symbol
Start value of the x axis
Stop value of the x axis
Y axis reference value
Y axis reference position
Trace number
Result type
Result display
Demodulation type
Result mode
Unit of the x axis
Unit of the y axis
Trace mode
Number of measurement points
Measured values: <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
207
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
Notation
4 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
This chapter lists and describes all remote control commands specific to this software application.
For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands, refer to the corresponding subsystem in the base unit description.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.1 Notation
In the following sections, all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail, arranged according to the command subsystems. The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard. The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands.
Individual Description
The individual description contains the complete notation of the command. An example for each command, the *RST value and the SCPI information are included as well.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
208
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
Notation
Abbreviation
A
A-F
A-T
ADEMOD
BT
CDMA
EVDO
GSM
IQ
OFDM
OFDMA/WiBro
NF
PHN
PSM
SFM
SPECM
TDS
VSA
WCDMA
The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations:
WLAN
Description
spectrum analysis spectrum analysis – span > 0 only (frequency mode) spectrum analysis – zero span only (time mode) analog demodulation (option R&S
FSV-K7)
Bluetooth (option R&S
FSV-K8)
CDMA 2000 base station measurements (option R&S
FSV-K82)
1xEV-DO base station analysis (option R&S
FSV-K84)
GSM/Edge measurements (option R&S
FSV-K10)
IQ Analyzer mode
WiMAX IEEE 802.16 OFDM measurements (option R&S
FSV-K93)
WiMAX IEEE 802.16e OFDMA/WiBro measurements (option R&S
FSV-K93)
Noise Figure measurements (R&S
FSV-K30)
Phase Noise measurements (R&S
FSV-K40)
Power Sensor measurements (option R&S
FSV-K9)
Stereo FM measurements (optionR&S
FSV-K7S)
Spectogram mode (option R&S
FSV-K14)
TD-SCDMA base station / UE measurements (option R&S
FSV-K76/K77)
Vector Signal Analysis (option R&S
FSV-K70)
3GPP Base Station measurements (option R&S
FSV-K72), 3GPP UE measurements (option R&S
FSV-K73)
WLAN TX measurements (option R&S
FSV-K91)
The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit. For the other modes, the corresponding options are required.
Upper/Lower Case Notation
Upper/lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description. The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
209
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
Notation
Special Characters
| A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands. These keywords are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:CW|:FIXed
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created. They set the frequency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz:
SENSe:FREQuency:CW 1E3
SENSe:FREQuency:FIXed 1E3
A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of
"or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example: Selection of the parameters for the command
[SENSe<1…4>:]AVERage<1…4>:TYPE VIDeo | LINear
[] Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header. The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards.
Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well.
{} Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command, either not at all, once or several times.
Description of Parameters
Due to the standardization, the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements. SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions, which are used in the tables of commands. In the tables, these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets (<…>) and is briefly explained in the following.
For details see the chapter "SCPI Command Structure" in the base unit description.
<Boolean>
This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states, "on" and "off". The "off" state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0, the "on" state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero. Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1.
<numeric_value> <num>
These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords (character data). The following keywords given below are permitted:
● MAXimum: This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
210
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
ABORt Subsystem
● MINimum: This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.
● DEFault: This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value.
● UP: This keyword increments the parameter value.
● DOWN: This keyword decrements the parameter value.
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command. They must be entered following the quotation mark.
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result.
<arbitrary block program data>
This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block.
4.2 ABORt Subsystem
ABORt
This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system.
Example:
ABOR;INIT:IMM
Mode:
all
4.3 CALCulate subsystem
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.1 CALCulate:DELTamarker subsystem
..........................................................................212
...........................................................................212
DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:APEak .........................................................212
DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ...........................................................213
DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT ..........................................................213
DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
........................................................213
..........................................................214
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
211
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT
............................................................214
DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT ...........................................................214
DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] .........................................................215
DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt ...........................................................215
.......................................................................215
........................................................................216
................................................................................216
DELTamarker<m>:X:ABSolute?
................................................................216
..................................................................217
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:AOFF
This command turns all active delta markers off.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT:AOFF
Switches off all delta markers.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:LINK <State>
This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1.
If you change the horizontal position of the marker, so does the delta marker.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
1 irrelevant
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:DELT:LINK ON
Manual operation:
See
"Link Mkr1 and Delta1" on page 134
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:APEak
This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value (maximum or minimum) of the selected trace.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Usage:
.
1..4
1..4
Event
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
212
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Mode:
all
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT:MAX:LEFT
Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum. The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT2:MAX:NEXT
Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value.
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum. If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT3:MAX
Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
213
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT:MAX:RIGH
Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value (i.e. descending X values). The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT:MIN:LEFT
Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum. The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
Example:
CALC:DELT2:MIN:NEXT
Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value.
Manual operation:
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
214
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum. The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT3:MIN
Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value (i.e. ascending X values). The corresponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT:MIN:RIGH
Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns delta markers on and off.
If the corresponding marker was a normal marker, it is turned into a delta marker.
No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Parameters:
<State>
Selects the marker.
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:DELT1 ON
Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode.
Manual operation:
See
See
"Marker Norm/Delta" on page 133
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
215
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:TRACe <TraceNumber>
This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on.
The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
<m>
Parameters:
<TraceNumber>
Example:
1 ... 6
Trace number the marker is positioned on.
CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2
Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X <Position>
This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
The position is an absolute value.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Position>
Example:
Depends on the measurement and scale of the horizontal axis
CALC:DELT:X?
Outputs the absolute frequency/time of delta marker 1.
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:ABSolute?
This command queries the absolute x-value of the selected delta marker in the specified window. The command activates the corresponding delta marker, if necessary.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
1..4
marker number
Usage:
Mode:
Query only all
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
216
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative
This command queries the x-value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position (for CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:STAT ON). The command activates the corresponding delta marker, if necessary.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:DELT3:X:REL?
Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position.
CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y?
This command queries the measured value of a delta marker. The corresponding delta marker is activated, if necessary. The output is always a relative value referred to marker
1 or to the reference position (reference fixed active).
To obtain a correct query result, a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value. This is only possible in single sweep mode.
Depending on the unit defined with CALC:UNIT:POW or on the activated measuring functions, the query result is output in the units below:
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Selects the marker.
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for its end.
CALC:DELT2 ON
Switches on delta marker 2.
CALC:DELT2:Y?
Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2.
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See
4.3.2 CALCulate:LIMit:MACCuracy subsystem
..........................................................................219
LIMit:MACCuracy:<ResultType>:<LimitType>:STATe
..................................219
LIMit:MACCuracy:<ResultType>:<LimitType>[:RESUlt]?
..............................220
LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:CURRent:VALue
..............................................221
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
217
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:MEAN:VALue
..................................................221
LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:PEAK:VALue ...................................................221
LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PCURrent:VALue ...................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PMEan:VALue .......................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PPEak:VALue
.......................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RCURrent:VALue
..................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RMEan:VALue
......................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RPEak:VALue
.......................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:FDERror:CURRent:VALue
..............................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:FDERror:MEAN:VALue ..................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:FDERror:PEAK:VALue ...................................................222
LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PCURrent:VALue ..............................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PMEan:VALue
..................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PPEak:VALue
...................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RCURrent:VALue
..............................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RMEan:VALue
..................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RPEak:VALue ...................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PCURrent:VALue .............................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PMEan:VALue .................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PPEak:VALue
..................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RCURrent:VALue
.............................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RMEan:VALue
LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RPEak:VALue
.................................................223
..................................................223
LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:CURRent:VALue
.............................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:MEAN:VALue ..................................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:PEAK:VALue ..................................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PCURrent:VALue ..............................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PMEan:VALue
LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PPEak:VALue
..................................................224
...................................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RCURrent:VALue
.............................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RMEan:VALue
..................................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RPEak:VALue ..................................................224
LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:CURRent:VALue ...................................................225
LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:MEAN:VALue ........................................................225
LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:PEAK:VALue
........................................................225
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:DEFault
Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
irrelevant
Usage:
Event
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Config ModAcc Limits" on page 137
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
218
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:STATe <LimitState>
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<LimitState> ON | OFF
*RST:
Mode:
VSA
OFF
Manual operation:
See
See
"Config ModAcc Limits" on page 137
See
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:<ResultType>:<LimitType>:STATe <LimitState>
This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off.
Suffix:
<n>
<ResultType>
.
1..4
window
CFERror | EVM | FDERror | FERRor | MERRor | OOFFset | PER-
Ror | RHO
CFERror = Carrier Frequency Error
EVM = Error Vector Magnitude
FERRor = Frequency error (FSK only)
FDERror = Frequency deviation error (FSK only)
MERRor = Magnitude Error
OOFFset = I/Q Offset
PERRor = Phase Error
RHO = Rho
<LimitType> CURRent | MEAN | PEAK | PCURRent | PMEan | PPEak | RCUR-
Rent | RMEan | RPEak
For CFERor, OOFFset, RHO:
CURRent
MEAN
PEAK
For EVM, FERRor, MERRor, PERRor:
PCURRent = Peak current value
PMEan = Peak mean value
PPEak = Peak peak value
RCURRent = RMS current value
RMEan = RMS mean value
RPEak = RMS peak value
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
219
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Setting parameters:
<LimitState> ON | OFF
Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type.
*RST: OFF
Example:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:CFER:CURR:VAL 100 Hz define a limit of [-100;100]
CALC2:LIM:MACC:CFER:CURR:STAT ON switch limit check ON
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Config ModAcc Limits" on page 137
See
"Current/Mean/Peak" on page 138
See
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:<ResultType>:<LimitType>[:RESUlt]?
<LimitResult>
This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated.
Suffix:
<n>
<ResultType>
.
1..4
window
CFERror | EVM | FDERror | FERRor | MERRor | OOFFset | PER-
Ror | RHO
CFERror = Carrier Frequency Error
EVM = Error Vector Magnitude
FDERror = Frequency deviation error (FSK only)
FERRor = Frequency error (FSK only)
MERRor = Magnitude Error
OOFFset = I/Q Offset
PERRor = Phase Error
RHO = Rho
<LimitType> CURRent | MEAN | PEAK | PCURRent | PMEan | PPEak | RCUR-
Rent | RMEan | RPEak
For CFERor, OOFFset, RHO:
CURRent
MEAN
PEAK
For EVM, FDERror, FERRor, MERRor, PERRor:
PCURRent = Peak current value
PMEan = Peak mean value
PPEak = Peak peak value
RCURRent = RMS current value
RMEan = RMS mean value
RPEak = RMS peak value
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
220
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<LimitResult> NONE | PASS | FAIL | MARGIN
NONE
No limit check result available yet.
PASS
All values have passed the limit check.
FAIL
At least one value has exceeded the limit.
MARGIN
currently not used
*RST: NONE
Example:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:CFER:CURR:VAL 100 Hz define a limit of [-100;100]
CALC2:LIM:MACC:CFER:CURR:STAT ON switch limit check ON
INIT:IMM;*WAI do single measurement
CALC2:LIM:MACC:CFER:CURR:RESULT?
query result
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:CURRent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:MEAN:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:CFERror:PEAK:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the limit for the current, peak or mean center frequency error limit.
Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value the value x (x>0) defines the interval [-x; x]
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 1000000
1000.0 (mean: 750.0)
Default unit: Hz
Example:
.
1..4
window
Mode:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:CFER:PEAK:VAL 100 Hz define a limit of [-100;100]
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
221
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:PPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:EVM:RPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the value for the current, peak or mean EVM (peak or RMS) limit.
Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 100
1.5
Default unit: %
Example:
.
1..4
window
Mode:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:EVM:RPE:VAL 2 define a limit of 2%
VSA
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FDERror:CURRent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FDERror:MEAN:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FDERror:PEAK:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the lower limit for the current, peak or mean center frequency deviation error. Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
This command is available for FSK modulation only.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
window
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 1000000
1 kHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
Mode:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:FDER:PEAK:VAL 1050 define a limit of 1050 Hz
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
222
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:PPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:FERRor:RPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the value for the current, peak or mean frequency error (peak or
RMS) limit. Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
This command is available for FSK modulation only.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
window
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value the value x (x>0) defines the interval [-x; x]
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 100
1.5 (mean: 1.0)
Default unit: Hz
Example:
Mode:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:FERR:RPE:VAL 15 define a limit of [-15;15] Hz
VSA
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:PPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:MERRor:RPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the value for the current, peak or mean magnitude error (peak or
RMS) limit. Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
window
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value the value x (x>0) defines the interval [-x; x]
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 100
1.5
Default unit: %
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
223
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Example:
Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:MERR:RPE:VAL 2.4% define a limit of 2.4%
VSA
Mode:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:CURRent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:MEAN:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:OOFFset:PEAK:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the upper limit for the current, peak or mean I/Q offset. Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
-200.0 to 0.0
-40.0 (mean: -45.0)
Default unit: dB
Example:
.
1..4
window
Mode:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:OOFF:PEAK:VAL -50dB define a limit of -50 dB
VSA
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:PPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RCURrent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RMEan:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:PERRor:RPEak:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the value for the current, peak or mean phase error (peak or RMS) limit. Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
window
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value the value x (x>0) defines the interval [-x; x]
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 360
3.5 (RMS: 1.5)
Default unit: deg
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
224
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Example:
Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:PERR:RPE:VAL 1.9deg
define a limit of 1.9 deg
VSA
Mode:
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:CURRent:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:MEAN:VALue <LimitValue>
CALCulate<n>:LIMit:MACCuracy:RHO:PEAK:VALue <LimitValue>
This command defines the lower limit for the current, peak or mean Rho limit. Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
<LimitValue> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 1.0
0.999 (mean: 0.9995)
Default unit: NONE
Example:
.
1..4
window
Mode:
CALC2:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' switch on result summary in screen 2
CALC2:LIM:MACC:RHO:PEAK:VAL 0.995
define a limit of 0.995
VSA
4.3.3 CALCulate:MARKer subsystem
..................................................................................226
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:ADRoop?
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:ALL?
.................................226
.......................................227
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:CFERror?
................................227
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:EVM?
......................................228
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FDERror? ................................229
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:CFDRift? ..........................230
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:DERRor? ..........................230
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:MDEViation?
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:RDEViation?
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:GIMBalance?
...........................233
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:IQIMbalance?
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:MERRor? ................................234
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:MPOWer? ...............................234
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:OOFFset? ...............................235
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:PERRor?
.................................236
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:QERRor?
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:RHO?
.................................236
......................................237
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
225
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:SNR?
......................................238
MARKer<m>:MAXimum:APEak .................................................................239
MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ...................................................................239
..................................................................239
..................................................................240
................................................................240
....................................................................241
...................................................................241
MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK] .................................................................241
MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt ...................................................................242
...............................................................................243
................................................................................243
........................................................................................243
MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
................................................................244
MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT ..................................................................245
MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM ..................................................................245
.......................................................................................246
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF
This command all markers off, including delta markers and marker measurement functions.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
depends on mode irrelevant
CALC:MARK:AOFF
Switches off all markers.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:ADRoop? <type>
This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement performed for digital demodulation. The output values are the same as those provided in the Mod-
ulation Accuracy table (see chapter 3.1.1.22, "Result Summary" , on page 94).
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
226
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<type>
Usage:
<none>
Amplitude droop in dB/symbol (for current sweep)
AVG
Amplitude droop in dB/symbol, evaluating the linear average value over several sweeps
RPE
Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps
SDEV
Standard deviation of amplitude droop
PCTL
95 percentile value of amplitude droop
*RST: PEAK
Query only
Mode:
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:ALL?
This command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Usage:
Mode:
.
1..4
screen number irrelevant
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:CFERror? <type>
This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement performed for digital demodulation.
The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table .
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
227
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Carrier frequency error for current sweep
AVG
Average carrier frequency error (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak carrier frequency error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of frequency error
PCTL
95 percentile value of frequency error
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:EVM? <type>
This command queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation. The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation
Accuracy table .
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
228
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Average EVM value of current sweep
AVG
RMS average EVM value (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak value of EVM (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps
PCTL
95% percentile of RMS value (over several sweeps)
PEAK
Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep
PAVG
Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps
TPEA
Maximum EVM over all symbols over several sweeps
PSD
Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps
PPCT
95% percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FDERror? <type>
This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated signals.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
screen number
1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
229
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Deviation error for current sweep.
AVG
Average FSK deviation error.
RPE
Peak FSK deviation error.
SDEV
Standard deviation of FSK deviation error.
PCTL
95 percentile value of FSK deviation error.
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:CFDRift? <type>
This command queries the results of the carrier frequency drift for FSK modulated signals.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
Usage:
<none>
Carrier frequency drift for current sweep.
AVG
Average FSK carrier frequency drift.
RPE
Peak FSK carrier frequency drift.
SDEV
Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift.
PCTL
95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift.
*RST: PEAK
Query only
Mode:
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:DERRor? <type>
This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
230
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
screen number
1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Frequency error for current sweep.
AVG
Average frequency error (over several sweeps).
RPE
Frequency error (over several sweeps).
SDEV
Standard deviation of frequency error.
PCTL
95 percentile value of frequency error.
PEAK
Maximum frequency error over all symbols of current sweep.
PAVG
Average of maximum frequency error values over several sweeps.
TPE
Maximum frequency error over all symbols over several sweeps.
PSD
Standard deviation of maximum frequency error values over several sweeps.
PPCT
95% percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps.
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:MDEViation?
<type>
This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated signals.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
screen number
1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
231
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Measurement deviation for current sweep.
AVG
Average FSK measurement deviation.
RPE
Peak FSK measurement deviation.
SDEV
Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation.
PCTL
95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation.
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:FSK:RDEViation?
<type>
This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Measurement deviation for current sweep.
AVG
Average FSK measurement deviation.
RPE
Peak FSK measurement deviation.
SDEV
Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation.
PCTL
95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation.
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
232
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:GIMBalance? <type>
This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation. The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation
Accuracy table .
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Gain imbalance error for current sweep
AVG
Average gain imbalance error (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak gain imbalance error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of gain imbalance error
PCTL
95 percentile value of gain imbalance error
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:IQIMbalance? <type>
This command queries the results of the I/Q imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
screen number
1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
233
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
I/Q imbalance error (for current sweep)
AVG
Average I/Q imbalance error (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak I/Q imbalance error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of I/Q imbalance error
PCTL
95 percentile value of I/Q imbalance error
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:MERRor? <type>
This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demodulation.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
magnitude error for current sweep
AVG
Average magnitude error (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak magnitude error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of magnitude error
PCTL
95 percentile value of magnitude error
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:MPOWer? <type>
This command queries the results of the power measurement of digital demodulation.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
234
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
screen number
1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
power measurement (for current sweep)
AVG
Average of power measurement (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak of power measurement (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of power measurement
PCTL
95 percentile value of power measurement
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:OOFFset? <type>
This command queries the results of the I/Q offset measurement performed for digital demodulation.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
Usage:
<none>
Origin offset error (for current sweep)
AVG
Average origin offset error (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak origin offset error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of origin offset error
PCTL
95 percentile value of origin offset error
*RST: PEAK
Query only
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
235
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Mode:
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:PERRor? <type>
This command queries the results of the phase error measurement performed for digital demodulation.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Phase error in degree
AVG
RMS phase error value (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak value of phase error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of phase error values over several sweeps
PCTL
95% percentile of RMS value (over several sweeps)
PEAK
Maximum phase error of current sweep
PAVG
Average of maximum phase error values over several sweeps
TPE
Maximum phase error over several sweeps
PSD
Standard deviation of maximum phase error values over several sweeps
PPCT
95% percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:QERRor? <type>
This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
236
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
screen number
1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
quadrature error (for current sweep)
AVG
Average quadrature error (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak quadrature error (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of quadrature error
PCTL
95 percentile value of quadrature error
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:RHO? <type>
This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
Usage:
<none>
Rho factor (for current sweep)
AVG
Average rho factor (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak rho factor (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of rho factor
PCTL
95 percentile value of rho factor
*RST: PEAK
Query only
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
237
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Mode:
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DDEMod:STATistic:SNR? <type>
This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
<m> 1..4
irrelevant
Query parameters:
<type>
<none>
Average SNR value of current sweep
AVG
RMS Average SNR value (over several sweeps)
RPE
Peak value of SNR (over several sweeps)
SDEV
Standard deviation of SNR values over several sweeps
PCTL
95% percentile of RMS value (over several sweeps)
PEAK
Maximum SNR over all symbols of current sweep
PAVG
Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps
TPE
Maximum SNR over all symbols over several sweeps
PSD
Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps
PPCT
95% percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps
*RST: PEAK
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LINK <MarkerCoupling>
With this command markers between several screens can be coupled, i.e. use the same stimulus. All screens can be linked with an X-axis scaled in symbols or time, except those showing the capture buffer. If several capture buffer measurements are visible, their markers are coupled, too.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
238
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
1..4
Setting parameters:
<MarkerCoupling> ON | OFF
*RST:
Mode:
VSA
OFF
Manual operation:
See
"Couple Screens (On/Off)" on page 133
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:APEak
This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value (maximum or minimum) of the selected trace.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Usage:
.
1..4
1..4
Event
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT
This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position (i.e. in descending X values).
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See
See
"Search Direction" on page 136
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT
This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
239
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Usage:
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:MAX:NEXT
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value.
Event
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt
This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value (i.e. in ascending X values).
If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Example:
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:MAX:RIGH
Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right of the current value.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See
See
"Search Direction" on page 136
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum.
The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode.
If no maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Example:
Usage:
CALC:MARK2:MAX
Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace.
Event
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
240
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Manual operation:
See
See
"Search Direction" on page 136
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:LEFT
This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value (i.e. in descending X direction).
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Usage:
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
CALC:MARK2:MIN:LEFT
Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value.
Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:NEXT
This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum.
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
CALC:MARK2:MIN:NEXT
Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum[:PEAK]
This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum.
The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode, if necessary.
If no minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values < peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
241
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Example:
CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:RIGHt
This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value (i.e. in ascending X direction).
If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values
< peak excursion), an execution error (error code: -200) is produced.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Example:
Usage:
Selects the marker.
CALC:MARK2:MIN
Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace.
CALC:MARK2:MIN:RIGH
Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value.
Event
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SEARch <MarkRealImag>
This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
1..4
1..4
irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<MarkRealImag> REAL | IMAG
*RST: REAL
Example:
Mode:
CALC4:MARK:SEAR IMAG
VSA
Manual operation:
See
See
"Marker Real / Marker Imag" on page 136
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
242
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State>
This command turns markers on and off.
If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker, it is turned into a normal marker.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:MARK3 ON
Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode.
Manual operation:
See
See
"Marker Norm/Delta" on page 133
See
See
"Select Mkr and Trace" on page 135
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe <Trace>
This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on.
The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than "Blank".
If necessary, the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment.
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
depends on mode
Selects the marker.
Parameters:
<Trace>
Example:
1 ... 6
Trace number the marker is positioned on.
CALC:MARK3:TRAC 2
Assigns marker 3 to trace 2.
Manual operation:
See
See
"Select Mkr and Trace" on page 135
See
"Move Marker to Trace" on page 135
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X <Position>
This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x-axis.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
243
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Parameters:
<Position>
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis. The unit is either Hz (frequency domain) or s (time domain) or dB (statistics).
Range: The range depends on the current x-axis range.
Example:
CALC:MARK2:X 1.7MHz
Positions marker 2 to frequency 1.7 MHz.
Manual operation:
See
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] <State>
This command turns marker search limits on and off.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation range on the trace.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
<m>
Parameters:
<State> marker
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches on search limitation.
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT <Limit>
This command sets the left limit of the marker search range.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation range to the trace.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on (see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
Parameters:
<Limit>
.
Selects the measurement window.
irrelevant
Range:
*RST:
-1e9 to 1e9
0.0
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
244
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Example:
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:LEFT 10MHz
Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz.
Manual operation:
See
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT <Limit>
This command sets the right limit of the marker search range.
If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation range to the trace.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on (
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
Suffix:
<n>
<m>
.
Selects the measurement window.
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Limit>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
-1e9 to 1e9
800.0
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Manual operation:
See
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM <State>
This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area.
Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on (see
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant irrelevant <m>
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:ZOOM ON
Switches the search limit function on.
CALC:MARK:X:SLIM:RIGH 20MHz
Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
245
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Manual operation:
See
See
CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y?
This command queries the measured value of a marker.
The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode, if necessary.
To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
Selects the marker.
<m>
Return values:
<Result> The measured value of the selected marker is returned.
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
CALC:MARK2 ON
Switches marker 2.
INIT;*WAI
Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
CALC:MARK2:Y?
Outputs the measured value of marker 2.
Query only
Usage:
Manual operation:
See
See
4.3.4 Other CALCulate commands
........................................................................247
............................................................................248
..........................................................................248
FSK:DEViation:COMPensation
..................................................................251
FSK:DEViation:REFerence:RELative
.........................................................251
FSK:DEViation:REFerence[:VALue]
...........................................................252
..........................................................................253
STATistics:SCALe:X:BCOunt
....................................................................254
.....................................................................254
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
246
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
........................................................................254
TRACe<t>:ADJust:ALIGnment:OFFSet ......................................................255
TRACe<t>:ADJust:ALIGnment[:DEFault] ....................................................255
.......................................................................256
..................................................................................256
...........................................................................................257
...........................................................................................257
CALCulate<n>:BERate <Format>
Queries the Bit Error Rate results. The available results are described in chapter 3.1.1.23,
"Bit Error Rate (BER)" , on page 100.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Return values:
<Format>
Mode:
VSA
Table 4-1: Parameters for BER result values
Result
Specifies a particular BER result to be queried. if no parameter is specified, the current bit error rate is returned.
The parameters for these results are listed in
.
Current Min Max Acc
Bit Error Rate
Total # of Errors
Total # of Bits
CURRent
TECurrent
TCURrent
MIN
TEMIN
TMIN
MAX
TEMAX
TMAX
TOTal
TETotal
TTOTal
CALCulate<n>:DDEM:SPECtrum[:STATe] <AddEvaluation>
This command switches the result display to spectrum mode. Spectral evaluation is available for the following result parameters:
● MAGNitude
● PHASe/UPHase
● FREQuency
● Real/Imag (RIMAG)
The result parameters are defined using the CALC:FORM command (see
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<AddEvaluation> ON | OFF
*RST: Off
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
247
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Example:
Mode:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
Selects the measurement signal for display.
CALC:FORM PHAS
Selects the phase as the result parameter.
CALC:DDEM:SPEC:STAT ON
Selects spectral display of the phase.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Result Type Transformation" on page 182
CALCulate<n>:ELIN<startstop>:STATe <Auto>
This command restricts the evaluation range. The evaluation range is considered for the following display types:
● eye diagrams
● constellation diagrams
● modulation accuracy
● statistic displays
● spectrum displays
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
<startstop> 1..2
Irrelevant.
Setting parameters:
<Auto> ON | OFF
ON
The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by
CALC:ELIN1:VAL to the stop value defined by
CALC:ELIN2:VAL (see CALCulate<n>:
OFF
The complete result area is evaluated.
*RST: OFF
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Entire Result Range" on page 172
CALCulate<n>:ELIN<startstop>[:VALue] <LeftDisp>
Defines the start and stop values for the evaluation range (see
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
248
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
<startstop> 1..2
1: start value, 2: stop value
Setting parameters:
<LeftDisp> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1000000
0
Default unit: SYM
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
See
CALCulate<n>:FEED <Feed>
Selects the signal source to be displayed.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Feed> 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS' | 'XTIM:DDEM:REF' |
'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH' | 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT' |
'XTIM:DDEM:MACC' | 'XTIM:DDEM:SYMB' | 'TCAP'
'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
Measured signal
'XTIM:DDEM:REF'
Reference signal
'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT'
Error vector
'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:MPH'
Modulation errors
'XTIM:DDEM:MACC'
Modulation accuracy
'XTIM:DDEM:SYMB'
Symbol table
'TCAP'
Capture Buffer
Example:
Mode:
Switch to EVM:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:ERR:VECT'
CALC:FORM MAGN
Switch to Meas Signal, Frequency Relative
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
CALC:FORM FREQ
DISP:WIND1:TRAC1:Y:SCAL:MODE REL
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
249
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Manual operation:
See
See
See
CALCulate<n>:FORMat <Format>
This command defines the result type of the traces. Which parameters are available
depends on the setting for CALC:FEED (see
Table 4-2: Available result types depending on source type
Source Type Result Type Parameter
Capture Buffer
Meas & Ref Signal
Symbols
Error Vector
Magnitude Absolute
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Frequency Absolute
Vector I/Q
Magnitude Absolute
Magnitude Relative
Phase Wrap
Phase Unwrap
Frequency Absolute
Frequency Relative
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Eye Diagram Real (I)
Eye Diagram Imag (Q)
Eye Diagram Frequency
Constellation I/Q
Constellation I/Q (Rotated)
Vector I/Q
Constellation Frequency
Vector Frequency
Binary
Octal
Decimal
Hexadecimal
EVM
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Vector I/Q
-
-
-
-
RCON
COMP
CONF
COVF
MAGNitude
RIMag
COMP
MAGNitude
RIMag
FREQuency
COMP
MAGNitude
MAGNitude
PHASe
UPHase
FREQuency
FREQuency
RIMag
IEYE
QEYE
FEYE
CONS
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
250
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Source Type
Modulation Errors
Result Type
Magnitude Error
Phase Error
Frequency Error Absolute
Frequency Error Relative
Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate
Parameter
MAGNitude
PHASe
FREQuency
FREQuency
BERate
Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined using the
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:MODE command (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Format> MAGNitude | PHASe | UPHase | RIMag | FREQuency | COMP |
CONS | IEYE | QEYE | FEYE | CONF | COVF | IQCorr |
RCONstellation | RSUMmary | BERate | NONE
Example:
Mode:
CALC:FEED 'XTIM:DDEM:MEAS'
Selects the measurement signal
CALC:FORM PHAS
Selects the phase measurement
CALC:DDEM:SPEC:STAT ON
Selects the spectral evaluation
VSA
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:FSK:DEViation:COMPensation <RefDevCompensation>
This command selects the method for calculating the frequency error for FSK modulation.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
.
1..4
Mode:
*RST:
VSA
ON
CALCulate<n>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence:RELative <FSKRefDev>
This command sets the relative reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation. The reference is in relation to the symbol rate.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
251
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Setting parameters:
<FSKRefDev> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.1 to 15
1
Default unit: NONE
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"FSK Ref Deviation" on page 148
CALCulate<n>:FSK:DEViation:REFerence[:VALue] <FSKRefDevAbsResult>
This command sets the absolute reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
.
1..4
Mode:
Range: The range depends on the symbol rate and has to be between 0.1 to 15 times the symbol rate.
*RST: 100e3
Default unit: Hz
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"FSK Ref Deviation" on page 148
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:CCDF[:STATe] <AddEvaluation>
This command switches the calculation of the statistical distribution of magnitude, phase or frequency values on or off.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<AddEvaluation> ON | OFF
*RST:
Example:
Mode:
OFF
CALC:STAT:CCDF ON
Switches the statistic measurements on.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Result Type Transformation" on page 182
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:MODE <StatisticMode>
This command defines whether only the symbol points or all points are considered for the statistical calculations.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
252
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<StatisticMode> SONLy | INFinite
SONLy
Symbol points only
INFinite
All points are used
*RST: SONLy
Example:
CALC1:STAT:MODE SONL
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet
This command sets both axis of the statistics measurement to measurement dependent default values.
Suffix:
<n>
Example:
Usage:
.
1..4
CALC:STAT:PRES
Event
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
"Default Settings" on page 118
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO <AutoMode>
Sets the x-axis of the statistics measurement depending on the measured values.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<AutoMode> ONCE
Example:
CALC3:STAT:SCAL:AUTO ONCE
Usage:
Setting only
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
253
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:BCOunt <StatisticsNofColumns>
This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution.
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
.
1..4
Example:
Range: 2 to 1024
*RST: 101
Default unit: NONE
CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:BCO 10
Sets the number of columns to 10.
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:LOWer <Value>
This command defines the lower limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical measurements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values are dimensionless.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Value>
.
selects the screen
1E-9 to 0.1
*RST: 1E-6
Example:
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:LOW 0.001
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
"y-Axis Min Value" on page 118
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UNIT <Unit>
This command defines the scaling type of the y-axis.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Unit>
.
selects the screen
PCT | ABS
*RST: ABS
Example:
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UNIT PCT
Sets the percentage scale.
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
254
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer <Value>
This command defines the upper limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical measurements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values are dimensionless.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Value>
.
irrelevant
1E-8 to 1.0
*RST: 1.0
CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 0.01
Example:
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
"y-Axis Max Value" on page 118
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>:ADJust:ALIGnment:OFFSet <FitOffset>
This command shifts the display range (relative to the reference time) by the number of given symbols. The resolution is 1 symbol. A value >0 results in a shift towards the right, and a value <0 results in a shift towards the left.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
irrelevant
<t>
Setting parameters:
<FitOffset> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
-8000 to 8000
0
Default unit: SYM
Example:
1..6
irrelevant
CALC:TRAC:ADJ:ALIG:OFFS 5
The display range is shifted by 5 symbols towards the right.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>:ADJust:ALIGnment[:DEFault] <Alignment>
This command defines where the relevant event (reference point) is to appear in the result range.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
255
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
<t>
Setting parameters:
<Alignment> LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt
LEFT
The reference point is displayed at the left edge of the result range.
CENTer
The reference point is displayed in the middle of the result range.
RIGHt
The reference point is displayed at the right edge of the result range.
*RST: LEFT
Example:
1..6
irrelevant
CALC:TRAC:ADJ:ALIG LEFT
The reference point is displayed at the left edge.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>:ADJust[:VALue] <Reference>
This command defines the reference point for the display.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
irrelevant
1..6
irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<Reference> TRIGger | BURSt | PATTern
TRIGger
The reference point is the start of the capture buffer.
BURSt
The reference point is the burst.
PATTern
The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment.
*RST: TRIGger
Example:
:CALC:TRAC:ADJ BURS
Defines the reference point as the burst.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
CALCulate<n>:TRACe<t>[:VALue] <TrRefType>
This commands selects the meas or the ref signal for a trace.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
256
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
CALCulate subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
Setting parameters:
<TrRefType> MEAS | REF
*RST: The default for trace 1 is always the measurement signal (MEAS). For all other traces, the default signal type depends on the current measurement.
Example:
CALC2:TRAC5 MEAS
Sets the measurement signal for trace 5.
Usage:
Mode:
SCPI confirmed
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6" on page 125
See
"Evaluation (Meas/Ref)" on page 127
CALCulate<n>:UNIT:ANGLe <Unit>
This command selects the default unit for angles.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Unit> DEG | RAD
*RST: RAD
Example:
Mode:
CALC:UNIT:ANGLe DEG
Selects degrees as the default unit.
VSA
CALCulate<n>:X:UNIT:TIME <Unit>
This command selects the unit (symbols or seconds) for the x axis.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Unit> S | SYM
*RST:
Example:
Mode:
SYM
CALC:X:UNIT:TIME S
Sets the unit to seconds.
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
257
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Manual operation:
See
See
See
4.4 DISPlay subsystem
..............................................................................258
............................................................................259
...........................................................................................259
.........................................................................................259
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision
....................................................261
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:RPOSition
...................................................261
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue
......................................................262
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:STARt?
.......................................................262
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:VOFFset .....................................................263
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO[:VALue] .............................................264
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO:ALL
...................................................264
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE
.........................................................264
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe][:PDIVision]
..................................................265
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
.......................................................265
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
...........................................266
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition ...................................................266
WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue ......................................................266
..............................................................................267
...............................................................................267
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:PRATe:AUTO <DisplayPPSMode>
This command turns auto mode of points per symbol on or off. If "Auto" is enabled, most measurements use the current "Capture Oversampling" (see
on page 295). Alternatively, select the number of points to be displayed per sym-
bol manually (see
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:PRATe[:VALue]
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<DisplayPPSMode> AUTO | MANual
*RST: AUTO
Example:
Mode:
DISP:WIND2:PRAT:AUTO?
Queries the points per symbol mode.
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
258
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Manual operation:
See
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:PRATe[:VALue] <DisplayPPS>
This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:PRATe:AUTO
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
<DisplayPPS> 1, 2, 4, 8,16 or 32
*RST: 4
Example:
.
1..4
DDEM:PRAT 8
Sets 8 points per symbol.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SIZE <Size>
This command configures the measurement display.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Size> SMALl | LARGe
LARGe
diagram in full screen
SMALl
split screen (diagram and table)
Mode:
VSA
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:STATe <Active>
Activates/deactivates the window specified by the suffix <1...4>.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Active> ON | OFF
*RST:
Example:
ON
DISP:WIND1:STAT ON
Activates window 1.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
259
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE <Mode>
This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces. WRITE corresponds to the Clr/Write mode of manual operation. The trace is switched off (= BLANK in manual operation) with
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe]
The number of measurements for AVERage, MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the
[SENSe]:SWEep:COUNt[:VALue]
on page 317 command. Note that synchronization
to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode.
Suffix:
<n>
.
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
trace <t>
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
WRITe | VIEW | AVERage | MAXHold | MINHold | BLANk
*RST: WRITe for TRACe1, STATe OFF for TRACe2/3/4/5/6
For details on trace modes refer to chapter 3.4.1, "Trace Mode
INIT:CONT OFF
Switching to single sweep mode.
SWE:COUN 16
Sets the number of measurements to 16.
DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH
Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps.
Manual operation:
See
"Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6" on page 125
See
See
See
See
See
See
See
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] <State>
This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace. The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
trace
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
260
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 6
DISP:TRAC3 ON
Example:
Manual operation:
See
"Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6" on page 125
See
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol
This command defines the display of the decision instants (time when the signals occurred) on the trace.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
Example:
DISP:WIND1:TRAC:SYMB ON
Defines that the decision instants are displayed in the form of dots.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Highlight Symbols" on page 181
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:PDIVision <PDiv>
This command defines the scaling of the X axis.
Setting the scale of the horizontal axis is possible only for statistical result displays. All other result displays support the query only.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
Setting parameters:
<PDiv> numeric value numeric value
Example:
DISP:TRAC:X:PDIV 20
Sets the scaling of the Y axis to 20 DIV.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:RPOSition <RPos>
This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
261
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays.
All other result displays support the query only.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
<t> 1..6
Setting parameters:
<RPos> numeric value
<numeric_value>
Example:
DISP:TRAC:X:RPOS 30 PCT
The reference value is shifted by 30% towards the left.
Mode:
VSA
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:RVALue <RVal>
This command defines the reference value for the X axis of the measurement diagram.
Setting the reference value of the x axis is possible only for statistical result displays. All other result displays support the query only.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
Setting parameters:
<RVal> numeric value
Reference value for the X axis
Example:
DISP:TRAC:X:RVAL 20
Sets the reference value to 20.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Ranges (statistic measurements)" on page 117
See
"X-Axis Reference Value" on page 117
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:STARt?
This command queries the first value of the x-axis in symbols or time, depending on the unit setting for the x-axis.
Note: In the "Result Range Alignment And Evaluation Range" dialog (or using the
CALC:TRAC:ALIG commands), the burst on the screen is shifted; the x-axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
262
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Example:
Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
CALC:TRAC:ADJ BURS
Defines the burst as the reference for the screen display.
CALC:TRAC:ADJ:ALIG CENT
Position the burst at the center of the screen.
DISP:TRAC:X:STAR?
Queries the start value of the X axis.
Query only
VSA
Usage:
Mode:
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:VOFFset <VOffset>
This command adds an offset to the symbols shown in the result display.
The offset is available for all result displays except the capture buffer.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
<t> 1..6
Setting parameters:
<VOffset> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
-100000 to 100000
0
Default unit: NONE
Example:
DISP:TRAC:X:VOFF 20
Adds an offset of 20 to the number of symbols.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Symbol Number at <Reference> start" on page 171
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] <Range>
This command defines the display range of the y-axis with logarithmic scaling.
The command works only for a logarithmic scaling. You can select the scaling with
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing
Suffix:
<n>
.
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
irrelevant <t>
Parameters:
<Range>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
10 to 200
100
Default unit: dB
DISP:TRAC:Y 110dB
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
263
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Manual operation:
See
See
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO[:VALue]
This command automatically scales the vertical axis of the specified screen.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
Example:
.
1..4
1..6
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:SCAL:AUTO
Auto scaling for screen B
Usage:
Mode:
Event
VSA
Manual operation:
See
See
"Y-Axis Autorange" on page 117
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO:ALL
This command automatically scales the vertical axis of all screens.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
Example:
Usage:
DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:SCAL:AUTO:ALL
Event
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens" on page 122
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the type of scaling of the y-axis.
is turned off, this command has no immediate effect on the screen.
Suffix:
<n>
.
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
264
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
Example:
ABSolute
absolute scaling of the y-axis
RELative
relative scaling of the y-axis
*RST: ABS
DISP:TRAC:Y:MODE REL
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe][:PDIVision] <Range>
This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams, where possible
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
1..4
1..6
irrelevant
Setting parameters:
<Range> numeric value
Range: 1 to 1000000
*RST: 100
Default unit: NONE
Example:
DISP:TRAC1:Y:PDIV 2 dB
Mode:
VSA
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ReferenceLevel>
This command defines the reference level.
With the reference level offset
≠ 0, the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset.
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant.
<t> irrelevant
Parameters:
<ReferenceLevel> The unit is variable.
Range:
*RST: see datasheet
-10dBm
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV -60dBm
Manual operation:
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
265
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <Value>
This command defines a reference level offset.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
irrelevant.
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> Range:
*RST:
-200 to 200
0
Default unit: dB
DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS -10dB
Example:
Manual operation:
See
"Ref Level Offset" on page 121
See
"Ref Level Offset" on page 155
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <Position>
This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid..
When using a tracking generator (only with option R&S
FSV-B9 or -B10, requires active normalization), and in Bluetooth mode (option R&S
FSV-K8) this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
Parameters:
<Position>
.
Selects the measurement window.
irrelevant
0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border, 100% corresponds to the upper display border.
Range:
*RST:
0 to 100
Spectrum mode: 100 PCT, with tracking generator or time display: 50 PCT
Default unit: PCT
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50PCT
Manual operation:
See
See
"Y-Axis Reference Position" on page 117
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <Value>
The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid.
When using a tracking generator, this command requires active normalization.
Suffix:
<n>
<t>
.
irrelevant irrelevant
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
266
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
DISPlay subsystem
Parameters:
<Value>
Example:
*RST: 0 dB, coupled to reference level
DISP:TRAC:Y:RVAL -20dBm
Defines a reference position of -20 dBm.
Manual operation:
See
See
"Y-Axis Reference Value" on page 116
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <ScalingType>
This command selects the scaling of the y-axis.
Suffix:
<n>
.
Selects the measurement window.
irrelevant <t>
Parameters:
<ScalingType>
LOGarithmic
Logarithmic scaling.
LINear
Linear scaling in %.
LDB
Linear scaling in dB.
*RST: LOGarithmic
Example:
DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN
Select a linear scale.
Manual operation:
See
See
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:STATe <State>
This command turns the zoom on and off.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<State>
.
Selects the measurement window.
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example:
DISP:ZOOM ON
Activates the zoom mode.
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:ZOOM:AREA <x1>, <y1>, <x2>, <y2>
This command defines the zoom area.
Before you can define a zoom area, you first have to turn the zoom on.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
267
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
FORMat subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<x1>,<y1>,
<x2>,<y2>
Example:
.
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
Diagram coordinates in % of the complete diagram that define the zoom area.
The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system. The upper right corner is the end point of the system.
Range: 0 to 100
Default unit: PCT
DISP:ZOOM ON
Activates the zoom mode.
DISP:ZOOM:AREA 5,30,20,100
Enlarges the display of the measurement results in the area defined by the coordinates (5,30) and (20,100).
4.5 FORMat subsystem
........................................................................................268
..............................................................................................269
FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator <Separator>
This command defines which decimal separator (decimal point or comma) is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format. Different languages of evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) can thus be supported.
Parameters:
<Separator> POINt | COMMA
*RST: (factory setting is POINt; *RST does not affect setting)
Example:
FORM:DEXP:DSEP POIN
Sets the decimal point as separator.
Manual operation:
See
"ASCII Trace Export" on page 128
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
268
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INITiate Subsystem
FORMat:DEXPort:HEADer <Header>
This command defines if an extended file header (including start frequency, sweep time, detector, etc.) is created or not. A short header with the instrument model, the version and the date is always transferred.
Setting parameters:
<Header> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example:
FORM:DEXP:HEAD OFF
Only a short file header is transferred.
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"ASCII Trace Export" on page 128
See
FORMat:DEXPort:MODE <Mode>
This command defines whether raw I/Q data or trace data is transferred.
Setting parameters:
<Mode> RAW | TRACe
*RST: TRACe
Example:
FORM:DEXP:MODE RAW
Raw measurement data is transferred.
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"ASCII Trace Export" on page 128
See
4.6 INITiate Subsystem
................................................................................................270
INITiate<n>:CONMeas
This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode.
The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point.
, this command does not reset traces in maxhold, minhold or average mode. Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using max hold or averaging functions.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
269
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INITiate Subsystem
In single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization.
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps.
INIT:CONM;*WAI
Continues the measurement (next 20 sequences) and waits for the end.
Manual operation:
See
"Continue Single Sweep" on page 123
INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State>
This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated (continuous) or performs single measurements (single).
The sweep is started immediately.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<State>
.
irrelevant
ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example:
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches the sequence to single sweep.
INIT:CONT ON
Switches the sequence to continuous sweep.
all
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"Continuous Sweep" on page 123
See
INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]
The command initiates a new measurement sequence.
With sweep count > 0 or average count > 0, this means a restart of the indicated number of measurements. With trace functions MAXHold, MINHold and AVERage, the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
270
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INPut Subsystem
In single sweep mode, you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with *OPC,
*OPC? or *WAI. In continuous sweep mode, synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible. Thus, it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control, as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization.
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant
Example:
Mode:
INIT:CONT OFF
Switches to single sweep mode.
DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER
Switches on trace averaging.
SWE:COUN 20
Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps.
INIT;*WAI
Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps.
all
INITiate:REFMeas
Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data. This is useful after changing settings, for example filters, patterns or evaluation ranges.
Usage:
Mode:
Event
VSA
Manual operation:
See
4.7 INPut Subsystem
...............................................................................................272
..........................................................................................274
.............................................................................................274
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
271
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INPut Subsystem
INPut:ATTenuation <Value>
This command programs the input attenuator. To protect the input mixer against damage from overloads, the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals, not by using the
DOWN command.
The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps (with option R&S
FSV-B25: 1 dB steps). If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly.
In the default state with "Spectrum" mode, the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument. If the attenuation is programmed directly, the coupling to the reference level is switched off.
This function is not available if the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) is active.
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 10 dB (AUTO is set to ON)
Example:
INP:ATT 30dB
Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level.
Mode:
all
Manual operation:
See
"RF Atten Manual/Mech Att Manual" on page 119
See
INPut:ATTenuation:AUTO <State>
This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level (state
ON) or switches the input attenuation to manual entry (state OFF).
This function is not available if the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) is active.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example:
INP:ATT:AUTO ON
Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level.
Manual operation:
See
"RF Atten Auto/Mech Att Auto" on page 120
See
"Attenuation Mode" on page 155
INPut:COUPling <CouplingType>
Toggles the RF input of the R&S
FSV between AC and DC coupling.
This function is not available if the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) is active.
Parameters:
<CouplingType> AC | DC
*RST: AC
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
272
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INPut Subsystem
Example:
INP:COUP:DC
Manual operation:
See
See
INPut:DIQ:CDEVice
This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-B17).
For details see the section "Interface Status Information" for the R&S Digital I/Q Interface
(R&S
FSV-B17) in the description of the base unit.
Return values:
<ConnState> Defines whether a device is connected or not.
0
No device is connected.
1
A device is connected.
<DeviceName>
<SerialNumber>
<PortName>
Device ID of the connected device
Serial number of the connected device
Port name used by the connected device
<SampleRate> Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz (depends on the used connection protocol version; indicated by <SampleRateType> parameter)
<MaxTransferRate> Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz
<ConnProtState> State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<PRBSTestState> State of the PRBS test.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
273
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INPut Subsystem
<SampleRateType> 0
Maximum sampling rate is displayed
1
Current sampling rate is displayed
<Placeholder>
Example:
for future use; currently "0"
INP:DIQ:CDEV?
Result:
1,SMU200A,103634,Out
A,70000000,100000000,Passed,Not Started,0,0
IQ, VSA, EVDO, CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, ADEMOD, TDS
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
See
"Connected Device" on page 140
See
INPut:DIQ:RANGe:COUPling <State>
If enabled, the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if the fullscale level changes.
This command is only available if the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17) is installed.
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) description of the base unit.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
INP:DIQ:RANG:COUP OFF
Mode:
IQ, VSA, EVDO, CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, ADEMOD, TDS
Manual operation:
See
See
"Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level" on page 141
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer] <Level>
Defines or queries the "Full Scale Level", i.e. the level that should correspond to an I/Q sample with the magnitude "1".
It can be defined either in dBm or Volt (see
"Full Scale Level" on page 141).
This command is only available if the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17) is installed.
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) description of the base unit.
Parameters:
<Level> <numeric value>
Range:
*RST:
70.711 nV to 7.071 V
1 V
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
274
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INPut Subsystem
Example:
Mode:
INP:DIQ:RANG 1V
A, IQ, NF, TDS, VSA, CDMA, EVDO, WCDMA, ADEMOD, GSM,
OFDM, OFDMA/WiBro, WLAN
Manual operation:
See
See
"Full Scale Level" on page 141
INPut:DIQ:RANGe[:UPPer]:UNIT <Unit>
Defines the unit of the full scale level (see "Level Unit" on page 141). The availability of
units depends on the measurement application you are using.
This command is only available if the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17) is installed.
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) description of the base unit.
Parameters:
<Level> V | dBm | dBpW | W | dBmV | dBuV | dBuA | A
*RST: Volt
Example:
Mode:
INP:DIQ:RANG:UNIT A
IQ, VSA, EVDO, CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, ADEMOD, TDS
Manual operation:
See
See
INPut:DIQ:SRATe <SampleRate>
This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R&S
Digital I/Q Interface (see "Input Sample Rate" on page 140).
This command is only available if the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-
B17) is installed.
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17) description of the base unit.
Parameters:
<SampleRate>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
1 Hz to 10 GHz
32 MHz
INP:DIQ:SRAT 200 MHz
Mode:
A, IQ, NF, TDS, VSA, CDMA, EVDO, WCDMA, ADEMOD, GSM,
OFDM, OFDMA/WiBro, WLAN
Manual operation:
See
See
"Input Sample Rate" on page 140
INPut:EATT <Attenuation>
This command defines the electronic attenuation.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
275
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INPut Subsystem
If necessary, the command also turns the electronic attenuator on.
This command is only available with option R&S
FSV-B25, but not if R&S FSV-B17 is active.
The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB. Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value.
If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation, the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning "Limit reached" is output.
Parameters:
<Attenuation> 0...25
*RST: 0 dB (OFF)
INP1:EATT 10 dB
Example:
Mode:
all
Manual operation:
See
"El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)" on page 120
See
"El Attenuation ON/OFF" on page 156
INPut:EATT:AUTO <State>
This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off. If activated, electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenuation whenever possible.
This command is only available with option R&S
FSV-B25, but not if R&S FSV-B17 is active.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example:
Mode:
INP1:EATT:AUTO OFF all
Manual operation:
See
See
"El Atten Mode (Auto/Man)" on page 120
INPut:EATT:STATe <State>
This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off.
This command is only available with option R&S
FSV-B25, but not if R&S FSV-B17 is active.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
INP:EATT:STAT ON
Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
276
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
INSTrument Subsystem
Manual operation:
See
"El Attenuation ON/OFF" on page 156
INPut:GAIN:STATe <State>
This command turns the 20
dB preamplifier on and off.
With option R&S
FSV-B22, the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz.
With option R&S
FSV-B24, the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range.
This command is not available when using R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17).
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example:
INP:GAIN:STAT ON
Turns the preamplifier on.
Manual operation:
See
INPut:SELect <Source>
This command selects the signal source for measurements.
Parameters:
<Source> RF | DIQ
RF
Radio Frequency ("RF INPUT" connector)
DIQ
Digital IQ (only available with R&S Digital I/Q Interface, option
R&S
FSV-B17)
*RST: RF
INP:SEL RF
Example:
Mode:
A, IQ, NF, TDS, VSA, CDMA, EVDO, WCDMA, ADEMOD, GSM,
OFDM, OFDMA/WiBro, WLAN
Manual operation:
See
See
4.8 INSTrument Subsystem
INSTrument:SELect <Mode>
This command switches the instrument to VSA mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
DDEM
VSA mode
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
277
R&S
®
FSV-K70
INST:SEL DDEM
VSA
Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
MMEMory Subsystem
Example:
Mode:
INSTrument:NSELect <Mode>
This command switches the instrument to VSA mode.
Parameters:
<Mode>
2
VSA mode
Example:
Mode:
INST:NSEL 2
VSA
4.9 MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory:LOAD:IQ:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command loads the I/Q data from the specified .iq.tar file.
Note: switch to single sweep mode (INIT:CONT OFF) before importing I/Q data as otherwise the instrument will continue to measure data and display the current results rather than the imported data.
Parameters:
<FileName> Complete file name including the path
Example:
Usage:
MMEM:LOAD:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Loads I/Q data from the specified file.
Setting only
MMEMory:SELect:ITEM:VIQData <Mode>
If enabled, the captured I/Q data is included in the save set when instrument data is stored
(single sweep mode only).
Parameters:
<Mode>
Mode:
ON | OFF
VSA
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:STATe 1, <FileName>
This command stores the complex I/Q data to the specified .iq.tar file in 32-bit floating point format.
Parameters:
<FileName> Complete file name including the path
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
278
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
MMEMory Subsystem
Example:
MMEM:STOR:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Stores I/Q data to the specified file.
Manual operation:
See
See
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM <Description>
Defines a description of the export file which is stored with the data and also displayed in the file selection dialog box for I/Q data import and export.
Parameters:
<Description>
Example:
MMEM:STOR:IQ:COMM 'Device test 1b'
Creates a description for the export file.
MMEM:STOR:IQ:STAT 1, 'C:
\R_S\Instr\user\data.iq.tar'
Stores I/Q data and the comment to the specified file.
Manual operation:
See
See
MMEMory:STORe:IQ:FORMat <Format>, <DataFormat>
This command defines the format of the I/Q data to be stored.
Parameters:
<Format> FLOat32 | INT32
Defines the format of the complex or real data.
*RST: FLOat32
<DataFormat> COMPlex | REAL
Defines whether complex or real data is exported.
*RST: COMPlex
Example:
Mode:
MMEM:STOR:IQ:FORM INT,REAL
Stores real I/Q data as integer values to the specified file (see
A, CDMA, EVDO, IQ, TDS, VSA, WCDMA
MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <Path>
This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII format. The file format is described in
chapter 3.4.2, "ASCII File Export Format for VSA
The decimal separator (decimal point or comma) for floating-point numerals contained in
the file is defined with the FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator command (see
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
279
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
OUTPut Subsystem
Suffix:
<n>
Setting parameters:
<Trace> 1 to 6 selected measurement trace
<Path>
.
window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measurement window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant.
DOS file name
The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name.
Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions.
Example:
MMEM:STOR:TRAC 3,'TEST.ASC'
Stores trace 3 in the file TEST.ASC.
Setting only
Usage:
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"ASCII Trace Export" on page 128
See
4.10 OUTPut Subsystem
OUTPut:DIQ <State>
If enabled, the captured IQ data is output to the R&S Digital I/Q Interface in a continuous stream. This function requires the LVDS interface option (R&S
FSV-B17).
Digital input and digital output cannot be used simultaneously.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
Mode:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
OUTP:DIQ ON
ADEMOD, IQ, VSA
OUTPut:DIQ:CDEVice
This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband output to the optional R&S Digital I/Q Interface (option R&S
FSV-B17).
For details see the R&S Digital I/Q Interface description for the base unit.
Return values:
<ConnState> Defines whether a device is connected or not.
0
No device is connected.
1
A device is connected.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
280
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
<DeviceName>
<SerialNumber>
<PortName>
Device ID of the connected device
Serial number of the connected device
Port name used by the connected device
<NotUsed> to be ignored
<MaxTransferRate> Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz
<ConnProtState> State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<PRBSTestState> State of the PRBS test.
Not Started
Has to be Started
Started
Passed
Failed
Done
<NotUsed> to be ignored
<Placeholder>
Example:
Mode:
for future use; currently "0"
OUTP:DIQ:CDEV?
Result:
1,SMU200A,103634,Out
A,70000000,100000000,Passed,Not Started,0,0
IQ, VSA
4.11 SENSe subsystem
]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer
.........................................................284
]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation
...................................................................284
]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE
........................................................284
.................................................................................286
................................................................................287
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
281
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
....................................................................................287
.....................................................................................288
.....................................................................................289
..................................................................................289
..................................................................................289
...................................................................................290
...................................................................................291
....................................................................................291
...................................................................................292
.................................................................................292
............................................................................294
...........................................................................294
DDEMod:NORMalize:IQIMbalance
.....................................................................294
..........................................................................294
............................................................................295
............................................................................296
.....................................................................................297
.......................................................................................298
....................................................................................298
...............................................................................300
..............................................................................................301
........................................................................301
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:CONFigure:AUTO
.......................................................301
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:GLENgth[:MINimum]
...................................................302
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:LENGth:MAXimum ......................................................302
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:LENGth[:MINimum] .....................................................302
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:SKIP:FALLing
.............................................................303
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:SKIP:RISing
...............................................................303
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:STATe
.......................................................................304
DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:TOLerance
.................................................................304
DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:CONFigure:AUTO ....................................................305
DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:SYNC[:STATe] ........................................................305
DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:SYNC:AUTO
...........................................................305
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
282
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
.........................................................................305
.........................................................................307
DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete
.......................................................................308
DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:IQCThreshold
..............................................................308
........................................................................308
........................................................................309
DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern:REMove ........................................................310
DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect
.......................................................................310
........................................................................310
..........................................................................311
.................................................................................311
..............................................................................312
DDEMod:STANdard:PREset[:VALue]
.................................................................312
................................................................................313
DDEMod:STANdard:SYNC:OFFSet:STATe
.........................................................313
DDEMod:STANdard:SYNC:OFFSet[:VALue]
.......................................................313
.....................................................................................315
.................................................................................................315
..................................................................................315
.................................................................................316
.........................................................................................317
....................................................................................317
..................................................................................317
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer <Threshold>
This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
(See
Parameters:
<Threshold> Range:
*RST:
0 to 200
+1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:LOW 2
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
283
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Example:
For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18
dBm.
Manual operation:
See
See
"Lower Level Hysteresis" on page 122
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer <Threshold>
This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level" function is performed.
(See
Parameters:
<Threshold> Range:
*RST:
0 to 200
+1 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS:ADJ:CONF:HYST:UPP 2
For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm, the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22
dBm.
Manual operation:
See
See
"Upper Level Hysteresis" on page 122
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation <Duration>
This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically (for SENS:ADJ:LEV ON).
Parameters:
<Duration> <numeric value> in seconds
Range:
*RST:
Default unit: s
0.001 to 16000.0
0.001
Example:
ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5
Manual operation:
See
See
"Meas Time Manual" on page 122
[SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE <Mode>
This command selects the way the R&S
FSV determines the length of the measurement that is performed while determining the ideal reference level.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO
Automatically determines the measurement length.
MANual
Manual definition of the measurement length.
*RST: AUTO
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
284
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Example:
Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:MODE MAN
Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration.
ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5
Specifies the duration manually.
[SENSe]:ADJust:LEVel
This command initiates automatic setting of the RF attenuation to the level of the applied signal.
Note: The following command must be synchronized to the end of the autorange process using *WAI, *OPC oder *OPC?, because otherwise the autorange process will be stopped.
Example:
Usage:
ADJ:LEV
Adjusts the reference level to the current measurement.
Event
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:ECALc:OFFSet <EVMOffsetState>
The command activates and deactivates an offset for the calculation of the EVM for
OQPSK modulated signals.
Setting parameters:
<EVMOffsetState> ON | OFF
*RST:
Mode:
VSA
ON
[SENSe]:DDEMod:ECALc[:MODE] <EvmCalc>
This command defines the calculation formula for EVM.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
285
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<EvmCalc> SIGNal | SYMBol | MECPower | MACPower
SIGNal
Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants.
SYMBol
Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants.
MECPower
Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants
MACPower
Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants
*RST: SIGNal
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:ECAL SIGN
EVM is normalized to the average power.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Normalize EVM to" on page 175
[SENSe]:DDEMod:EPRate:AUTO <LinkMode>
This command activates and deactivates automatic estimation oversampling for the modulation accuracy table.
Setting parameters:
<LinkMode> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Estimation Points/Sym" on page 176
[SENSe]:DDEMod:EPRate[:VALue] <EstimationOverSampling>
This command determines the number of estimation points per symbol for the modulation accuracy table.
Setting parameters:
*RST: 1
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Estimation Points/Sym" on page 176
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
286
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FACTory[:VALue] <Factory>
This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the R&S
FSV-
K70 option.
Setting parameters:
<Factory> ALL | STANdard | PATTern
ALL
Restores both standards and patterns.
*RST: ALL
Usage:
Setting only
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Digital Standards" on page 113
See
"Restore Standard Files" on page 114
See
"Restore Factory Settings" on page 114
See
"Restore Pattern Files" on page 114
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ALPHa <MeasFilterAlphaBT>
This command determines the filter characteristic (ALPHA/BT). The resolution is 0.01.
Setting parameters:
<MeasFilterAlphaBT> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.1 to 1.0
0.22
Default unit: NONE
Example:
DDEM:FILT:ALPH 0.5
Sets ALPHA/BT to 0.5
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:STATe] <MeasFilterState>
This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the measurement filter. This command has no effect on the Transmit filter.
Setting parameters:
<MeasFilterState> ON | OFF
ON
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:AUTO
OFF
The input signal is not filtered.
*RST: ON
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
287
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Example:
Mode:
Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
DDEM:FILT OFF
The input signal is not filtered.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FORMat <Group>
This command selects the digital demodulation mode.
Setting parameters:
<Group> MSK | PSK | QAM | QPSK | FSK | UQAM
QPSK
Quad Phase Shift Key
PSK
Phase Shift Key
MSK
Minimum Shift Key
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
*RST: PSK
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:FORM QAM
Selects QAM modulation.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSK:NSTate <FSKNstate>
This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme.
Setting parameters:
<FSKNstate> 2 | 4
2
2FSK
4
4FSK
*RST:
Mode:
VSA
2
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc:AUTO <FineSyncAuto>
If "Auto" mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use, the known data sequences are used. Otherwise, the detected data is used.
Setting parameters:
<FineSyncAuto> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
288
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Fine Synchronization" on page 177
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc:LEVel <SERLevel>
This command is only available if
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc[:MODE]
KDAT was performed.
It defines a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data. If the SER of the measured data exceeds this limit, the default synchronization using the detected data is performed.
A maximum SER level of 0 means that the file is only used if the measured data is identical to one of the specified data sequences.
Setting parameters:
<SERLevel> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.0 to 100.0
10.0
Default unit: PCT
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc:RESult?
This command queries whether a loaded Known Data file was used for fine synchronization or not. If a maximum symbol error rate was specified (using the
command) and exceeded, the file is not used.
Return values:
<Usage> 0 | 1
0
The Known Data file was not used do to the exceeded SER.
1
The Known Data file was used.
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Fine Synchronization" on page 177
[SENSe]:DDEMod:FSYNc[:MODE] <FineSync>
This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results, e.g. the bit error rate.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
289
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Note: You can define a maximum symbol error rate (SER) for the known data in reference to the analyzed data. If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit, the default synchronization using the detected data is performed. See
Setting parameters:
<FineSync> KDATa | PATTern | DDATa
KDATa
The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data.
PATTern
The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern.
This setting requires an activated pattern search, see
DDATa
(Default) The reference signal is estimated from the detected data.
*RST: DDATa
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:FSYN:MODE KDATa
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Fine Synchronization" on page 177
[SENSe]:DDEMod:KDATa:STATe <KnownDataState>
This command activates the usage of known data. The usage of known data is a prerequisite for the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine synchronization.
See
chapter 3.3.7, "Working With Known Data Files" , on page 199 for details.
Setting parameters:
<KnownDataState> ON | OFF
*RST:
Mode:
VSA
OFF
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:KDATa[:NAME] <FileName>
This command selects the Known Data file.
Setting parameters:
<FileName> string the path and file name of the xml file containing known data sequences.
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:KDAT:NAME 'D:\\MyData.xml'
VSA
Manual operation:
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
290
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MAPPing:CATalog?
This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current modulation type and order. A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols.
Example:
DDEM:MAPP:CAT?
Queries the list of mappings.
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Modulation Mapping" on page 149
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MAPPing[:VALue] <Mapping>
This command selects the mapping designated by <mapping_name> for the digital demodulation. The mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols.
Setting parameters:
<Mapping> string
<string>
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:MAPP 'GSM'
Sets mapping to GSM.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Modulation Mapping" on page 149
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:ALPHa <MeasFilterAlphaBT>
This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter.
Setting parameters:
<MeasFilterAlphaBT> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.1 to 1.0
0.22
Default unit: NONE
Example:
SENS:DDEM:MFIL:ALPH 0.8
Sets alpha to 0.8
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:AUTO <MeasFilterAuto>
If this command is set to "ON", the measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the Transmit filter.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
291
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<MeasFilterAuto> ON | OFF
Example:
*RST: ON
SENS:DDEM:MFIL:AUTO ON
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:NAME <Name>
This command selects a measurement filter and automatically switches it on.
Setting parameters:
<Name> Name of the measurement filter or 'User' for a user-defined filter.
An overview of available measurement filters is provided in
.
Example:
SENS:DDEM:MFIL:NAME 'RRC'
Selects the RRC measurement filter.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
See
"Load User Filter" on page 179
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter[:STATe] <MeasFilterState>
Use this command to switch the measurement filter off. To switch a measurement filter
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:NAME
Setting parameters:
<MeasFilterState> ON | OFF
OFF
Switches the measurement filter off.
ON
Switches the measurement filter specified by
on. However, this command is not necessary, as the
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:NAME
automatically switches the selected filter on.
*RST: ON
Example:
SENS:DDEM:MFIL:STAT OFF
Deactivates the measurement filter.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
292
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MFILter:USER <FilterName>
This command selects the user-defined measurement filter.
For details on creating user-defined filters, see
chapter 2.2.7, "Customized Filters" , on page 19.
Setting parameters:
<FilterName> Name of the user-defined filter
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:MFIL:NAME 'USER'
Selects user filter mode for the meas filter
ENS:DDEM:MFIL:USER 'D:\MyMeasFilter'
Selects the user-defined meas filter
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:MSK:FORMat <Name>
This command defines the specific demodulation mode for MSK.
Setting parameters:
<Name> TYPE1 | TYPE2 | NORMal | DIFFerential
TYPE1 | NORMal
MSK
TYPE2 | DIFFerential
DMSK
*RST: QPSK
Example:
DDEM:FORM MSK
Switches MSK demodulation on.
DDEM:MSK:FORM TYPE2
Switches DMSK demodulation on.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Modulation Order" on page 147
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:ADRoop <CompAmptDroop>
This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off.
Setting parameters:
<CompAmptDroop> ON | OFF
*RST:
Example:
ON
DDEM:NORM:ADR ON
Switches the compensation on.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Compensate for..." on page 174
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
293
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:CFDRift <CarrierFreqDrift>
This command activates or deactivates compensation of the carrier frequency drift.
Setting parameters:
<CarrierFreqDrift> ON | OFF
*RST:
Mode:
VSA
OFF
Manual operation:
See
"Compensate for..." on page 174
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:FDERror <RefDevCompensation>
This command selects the method for calculating the frequency error if you are using
FSK modulation.
Setting parameters:
ON
Scales the reference signal to the current deviation of the measurement signal
OFF
Uses the nominal deviation you have set for the reference signal
*RST: ON
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Compensate for..." on page 174
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:IQIMbalance <CompIQImbalance>
This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off.
Setting parameters:
<CompIQImbalance> ON | OFF
*RST:
Example:
OFF
DDEM:NORM:IQIM OFF
Switches the compensation off.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Compensate for..." on page 174
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize:IQOFfset <CompIQOffset>
This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off.
Setting parameters:
<CompIQOffset> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
294
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Example:
DDEM:NORM:IQOF OFF
Switches the compensation off.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Compensate for..." on page 174
[SENSe]:DDEMod:NORMalize[:VALue] <Normalize>
This command switches the compensation of the I/Q offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off. When queried, the command returns 1 if both are ON and 0 if both are off. Otherwise, an error is returned.
The command is kept because of compatibility to the R&S FSQ and won't be supported
in later versions. Instead, use the new command (
Setting parameters:
<Normalize> ON | OFF
*RST:
Example:
Mode:
ON
SENS:DDEM:NORM ON
Turn on IQ offset compensation and amplitude droop compensation
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PRATe <CaptOverSampling>
This command determines the number of captured points per symbol.
Setting parameters:
<CaptOverSampling> 4, 8,16, 32
*RST:
Example:
Mode:
4
DDEM:PRAT 8
Sets 8 points per symbol.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PRESet:CALC
This command selects the Signal Overview from the predefined tab of the display overview dialog box.
Example:
Usage:
SENS:DDEM:PRES:CALC
Resets the screen display to the presetting.
Event
Mode:
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
295
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PRESet:RLEVel
This command initiates automatic setting of the RF attenuation and IF gain to the level of the applied signal.
Note: The following command must be synchronized to the end of the autorange process using *WAI, *OPC or *OPC?, because otherwise the autorange process will be stopped.
Example:
Usage:
SENS:DDEM:PRES:RLEV;*WAI
Performs automatic level setting
Event
Mode:
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PRESet[:STANdard] <Standard>
This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user-defined transmission method. The standardized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards.
Setting parameters:
<Standard> string
Specifies the file name that contains the transmission method without the extension. For user-defined standards, the file path must be included. Default standards predefined by
Rohde&Schwarz do not require a path definition. A list of short forms for predefined standards is provided below.
Example:
DDEM:PRES 'TETRA_NDDOWN'
Switches the predefined digital standard "TETRA_Discontinuous-
Downlink" on.
DDEM:PRES 'C:\R_S\Instr\usr\standards\USER_GSM'
Switches the user-defined digital standard "USER_GSM" on.
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"Digital Standards" on page 113
See
For predefined standards, the following short forms can be used:
3G_WCDMA_FWD = 3G_WCDMA
3G_WCDMA_REV = 3G_WCDMA
APCO25_C4FM
APCO25_CQPSK
Bluetooth_DH1
Bluetooth_DH3
Bluetooth_DH5
CDMA2K_1X_FWD = F1CD
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
296
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
CDMA2K_1X_REV = R1CD
DECT_P32_FixedPart = DECT_FP
DECT_P32_PortablePart
DVB_S2_16APSK
DVB_S2_32APSK
DVB_S2_8PSK
DVB_S2_QPSK
EDGE_NB = EDGE_8PSK
EDGE_NormalBurst = EDGE_8PSK
EDGE_16QAM
EDGE_32QAM
F1CD = CDMA2K_1X_FWD
GSM_AB = GSM_AccessBurst
GSM_FB = GSM_FrequencyBurst
GSM = GSM_NormalBurst
GSM_AB = GSM_AccessBurst
GSM_FB = GSM_FrequencyBurst
GSM_NB = GSM_NormalBurst
GSM_SB = GSM_SynchronisationBurst
TETRA_NCDOWN = TETRA_ContinousDownlink
TETRA_NDDOWN = TETRA_DiscontinuousDownlink
ZIGBEE_BPSK_868M_300K
ZIGBEE_BPSK_915M_600K
ZIGBEE_OQPSK_2450M_1M
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PSK:FORMat <Name>
Together with DDEMod:PSK:NST, this command defines the demodulation order for PSK
on page 298). Depending on the demodu-
lation format and state, the following orders are available:
8
8
NSTATe
2
Format
any
NORMal
DIFFerential
Order
BPSK
8PSK
D8PSK
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
297
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
NSTATe
8
8
Format
N3Pi8
PI8D8PSK
Order
3pi/8-8PSK (EDGE)
Pi/8-D8PSK
Setting parameters:
<Name> NORMal | DIFFerential | N3Pi8 | PI8D8PSK
*RST: QPSK
Example:
DDEM:FORM PSK
Switches PSK demodulation on.
DDEMod:PSK:NST 8
DDEM:PSK:FORM DIFF
Switches D8PSK demodulation on.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Modulation Order" on page 147
[SENSe]:DDEMod:PSK:NSTate <PSKNstate>
Together with DDEMod:PSK:FORMat, this command defines the demodulation order for
on page 297). Depending on the
demodulation format and state, the following orders are available:
8
8
8
8
NSTATe
2
FORMat
any
NORMal
DIFFerential
N3Pi8
PI8D8PSK
Order
BPSK
8PSK
D8PSK
3pi/8-8PSK (EDGE)
Pi/8-D8PSK
Setting parameters:
<PSKNstate> numeric value
*RST: 2
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:FORM PSK
Switches PSK demodulation on.
DDEMod:PSK:NST 8
DDEM:PSK:FORM DIFF
Switches D8PSK demodulation on.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:QAM:FORMat <Name>
This command defines the specific demodulation mode for QAM.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
298
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
The current firmware release of the R&S
FSV-K70 does not support Differential QAM.
Setting parameters:
<Name> NORMal | DIFFerential | NPI4 | MNPI4
*RST: QPSK
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:FORM QAM
Switches QAM demodulation on.
DDEM:QAM:FORM NPI4
Switches Pi/4-16QAM demodulation on.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Modulation Order" on page 147
[SENSe]:DDEMod:QAM:NSTate <QAMNState>
This command defines the demodulation order for QAM.
64
128
256
NSTate
16
16
32
32
Order
16QAM
Pi/4-16QAM
32QAM
Pi/4-32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Setting parameters:
<QAMNState> numeric value
*RST: 16
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:FORM QAM
Switches QAM demodulation on.
DDEM:QAM:NST 64
Switches 64QAM demodulation on.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:QPSK:FORMat <Name>
This command defines the demodulation order for QPSK.
FORMat
NORMal
DIFFerential
Order
QPSK
DQPSK
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
299
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
FORMat
OFFSet
DPI4
Order
OQPSK
PI/4 DQPSK
Setting parameters:
<Name> NORMal | DIFFerential | DPI4 | OFFSet
*RST: NORMal
Example:
DDEM:FORM QPSK
Switches QPSK demodulation on.
DDEM:QPSK:FORM DPI4
Switches pi/4 DQPSK demodulation on.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Modulation Order" on page 147
[SENSe]:DDEMod:RLENgth:AUTO <RecLengthAuto>
This command switches the automatic adaptation of the capture length on or off. The automatic adaptation is performed so that a sufficient capture length is set as a function of result length, burst and pattern search and network-specific characteristics (e.g. burst and frame structure).
Setting parameters:
<RecLengthAuto> ON | OFF
*RST: ON
Example:
DDEM:RLEN:AUTO OFF
Does not set "RLENgth" automatically.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Capture Length Auto" on page 157
[SENSe]:DDEMod:RLENgth[:VALue] <RecordLength>
This command defines the capture length for further processing, e.g. for burst search.
The "RLENgth" is given in time (S) or symbols (SYM). As a result of a query, the value is given in time.
Note that the maximum record length depends on the capture oversampling rate (see
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158). For the default value =4, the maximum is 50.000.
For larger oversample rates, the maximum record length can be calculated as:
Recordlength
MAX
= 200.000/ <Capture oversampling>
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
300
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<RecordLength> numeric value
Range: 100 symbols = 26.042 us to 50000 symbols = 13.021
ms
*RST: 8000 symbols = 2.083 ms
Default unit: S
Example:
DDEM:RLEN 1000SYM
Sets a capture length of 1000 symbols.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SBANd <SidebandPos>
This command selects the sideband for the demodulation.
Setting parameters:
<SidebandPos> NORMal | INVerse
NORMal
Normal (non-inverted) position
INVerse
Inverted position
*RST: NORMal
Example:
DDEM:SBAN INV
Selects the inverted position.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:AUTO <AutoBurstSearch>
This command links the burst search to the type of signal. When a signal is marked as
bursted, burst search is switched on automatically (see also "Auto/On/Off" on page 163).
Setting parameters:
<AutoBurstSearch> AUTO | MANual
*RST: AUTO
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:BURS:AUTO AUTO
Enables auto burst search.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:CONFigure:AUTO <AutoConfigure>
This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
301
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<AutoConfigure> ON | OFF
Example:
*RST: ON
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:BURS:CONF:AUTO ON
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Auto Configuration" on page 163
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:GLENgth[:MINimum] <MinGapLength>
This command defines the minimum time between two bursts. A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts. The default unit is a symbol. The value can also be given in seconds.
Setting parameters:
<MinGapLength> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
1 to 15000
1
Default unit: SYM
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS:GLEN 3US
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Auto Configuration" on page 163
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:LENGth:MAXimum <MaxLength>
This command defines the maximum length of a burst. Only those bursts will be recognized that fall below this length. The default unit is symbols. The value can also be given in seconds.
Setting parameters:
<MaxLength> numeric value
Range: 0 to 15000
*RST: 1600
Default unit: SYM
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS:LENG:MAX 156 us
The maximum burst length is 156
µs.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:LENGth[:MINimum] <UsefulLength>
This command defines the minimum length of a burst. Only those bursts will be recognized that exceed this length. The default unit is symbols. The value can also be given in seconds.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
302
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<UsefulLength> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
10 to 15000
98
Default unit: SYM
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS:LENG 140 us
The minimum burst length is 140 us.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:MODE <MeasOnlyOnBurst>
This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found ("BURSt"). The command is available only if the burst search is activated beforehand using the DDEM:SEARch:BURSt:STATe = ON command (see
Setting parameters:
<MeasOnlyOnBurst> MEAS | BURS
*RST: MEAS
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS:MODE BURS
Measurement is performed only if burst is found.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Meas only if burst was found" on page 163
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:SKIP:FALLing <RunOut>
This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result.
The default unit is symbols. The value can also be given in seconds.
Setting parameters:
<RunOut> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0 to 15000
1
Default unit: SYM
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS:SKIP:FALL 5US
5
µs of the rising burst edge are not considered
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:SKIP:RISing <RunIn>
This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result. The default unit is symbols. The value can also be given in seconds.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
303
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<RunIn> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0 to 15000
1
Default unit: SYM
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS:SKIP:RIS 5US
5 us of the rising burst edge are not considered
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:STATe <SearchState>
This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off.
Setting parameters:
<SearchState> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:BURS OFF
Switches burst search off.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:BURSt:TOLerance <SearchTolerance>
This command controls burst search tolerance.
Setting parameters:
<SearchTolerance> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0 to 100000
4
Default unit: SYM
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:BURS:TOL 1
Sets the burst tolerance to 1
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"Auto Configuration" on page 163
See
"Search Tolerance" on page 163
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:MBURst:CALC <SelectResRangeNr>
Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep.
Setting parameters:
<SelectResRangeNr> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
1 to 1000000
1
Default unit: NONE
Mode:
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
304
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Manual operation:
See
"Select Result Rng" on page 124
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:CONFigure:AUTO <AutoConfigure>
This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value.
Setting parameters:
<AutoConfigure> ON | OFF
Example:
*RST: ON
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:PATT:CONF:AUTO ON
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Auto Configuration" on page 165
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:SYNC[:STATe] <FastSync>
Switches fast synchronization on and off, if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern.
Setting parameters:
<FastSync> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Coarse Synchronization" on page 176
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:PATTern:SYNC:AUTO <UseWfmForSync>
This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements.
Setting parameters:
<UseWfmForSync> AUTO | MANual
*RST: AUTO
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Coarse Synchronization" on page 176
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:AUTO <AutoPatternSearch>
This command links the pattern search to the type of signal. When a signal is marked as patterned, pattern search is switched on automatically.
Setting parameters:
<AutoPatternSearch> AUTO | MANual
*RST: AUTO
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC AUTO
Enables auto pattern search
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
305
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:CATalog <Patterns>
This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk.
Setting parameters:
<Patterns> CURRent | ALL
CURRent
Only patterns that belong to the current standard
ALL
All patterns
*RST: ALL
Example:
Mode:
:DDEM:PRES 'GSM_AB'
Selects the digital standard "GSM Access Burst".
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:PATT:ADD 'GSM_TSC1'
Adds "GSM_TSC1" to standard.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:CAT? CURR
Reads out all patterns that belong to the standard.
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COMMent <Comment>
This command defines a comment to a sync pattern. The pattern must have been
selected before using the DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME command (see
Setting parameters:
<Comment> string
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'GSM_TSC0'
Name of pattern.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA '0001000000000001'
Data of pattern.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:COMM 'PATTERN FOR PPSK'
Comment.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
See
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
306
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:COPY <Pattern>
This command copies a pattern file. The pattern to be copied must have been selected
before using the DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME command (see
Tip: In manual operation, a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name.
Setting parameters:
<Pattern> string
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'GSM_TSC0'
Selects the pattern.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:COPY 'GSM_PATT'
Copies "GSM_TSC0" to GSM_PATT.
Usage:
Mode:
Setting only
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DATA <Data>
This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern. The pattern must have been
selected before using the DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME command (see
Important: The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation,e.g. for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7. The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NST command (see
For details on defining patterns, see
"To create a new pattern" on page 196.
Setting parameters:
<Data> string
Four values represent a symbol (hexadecimal format). The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation. With a degree of modulation of 4, all symbols have a value range of: 0000,
0001, 0002, 0003; with a degree of modulation of 8: 0000, 0001,
0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
See
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
307
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:DELete
This command deletes a sync sequence. The sync sequence to be deleted must have been selected before using the DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME command (see
Example:
Usage:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'GSM_TSC0'
Selects the pattern.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DEL
Deletes GSM_TSC0 pattern.
Event
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:IQCThreshold <CorrelationLev>
This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent. A high level means stricter matching. See
"I/Q Correlation Threshold" on page 165 for details.
Setting parameters:
<CorrelationLev> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
10.0 to 100.0
90.0
Default unit: PCT
Example:
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:IQCT 85.5
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Auto Configuration" on page 165
See
"I/Q Correlation Threshold" on page 165
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:MODE <MeasOnlyOnPattern>
This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern (SYNC). The measured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found. Bursts with a wrong sync pattern (sync not found) are ignored. If an invalid or no sync pattern is found, the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid sync pattern is found. The command is available only if the sync sequence search is activated using the DDEM:SEARch:BURSt:STATe = ON command (see
on page 304). With "MEAS" selected, the measure-
ment is performed independently of successful synchronization.
Setting parameters:
<MeasOnlyOnPattern>MEAS | SYNC
*RST: MEAS
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
308
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:MODE SYNC
The measurement is performed only with successful synchronization.
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
See
"Meas only if pattern symbols correct" on page 165
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME <Name>
This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry.
Setting parameters:
<Name> string
Example:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'GSM_TSC0'
Selects the pattern GSM_TSC0.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
See
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NSTate <NState>
This command selects the degree of modulation (number of permitted states). The pattern must have been selected before using the DDEM:SEARch:SYNC:NAME command
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:NAME
The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode.
Setting parameters:
<NState> numeric value
Example:
Mode:
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'GSM_TSC0'
Selects the GSM_TSC0 pattern.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA '00010001'
Enters 00010001 as data.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NST 4
Sets the degree of modulation.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern:ADD <AddPattern>
This command adds a pattern to the current standard. Using the
DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:SEL command, only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard (see
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
309
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Setting parameters:
<AddPattern> string
Example:
Usage:
DDEM:PRES 'TETRA_NCDOWN'
Selects the standard "TETRA_NCDOWN".
DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:PATT:ADD 'TETRA_S1'
Adds the pattern "TETRA_S1" to the standard.
Setting only
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:PATTern:REMove
This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard.
Example:
DDEM:PRES 'TETRA_NCDOWN'
Selects the digital standard "Tetra".
DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:PATT:REM 'pattern'
Removes the pattern "pattern" from the "Tetra" standard.
Usage:
Mode:
Setting only
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
"Remove from Standard" on page 167
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:SELect <Select>
This command selects a predefined sync pattern file.
Setting parameters:
<Select> string
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:SEL 'GSM_TSC0'
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Select Pattern for Search" on page 166
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:STATe <PatternSearch>
This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off.
Setting parameters:
<PatternSearch> ON | OFF
*RST:
Example:
Mode:
OFF
DDEM:SEAR:SYNC ON
Switches the sync search on.
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
310
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
"Pattern Search On" on page 167
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SEARch:SYNC:TEXT <Text>
This command defines a text to explain the pattern. The text is displayed only in the selection menu (manual control). This text should be short and concise. Detailed information about the pattern is given in the comment (see
Setting parameters:
<Text> string
Example:
SENS:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:NAME 'GSM_1'
Selects the "GSM_1" pattern.
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:DATA '1001'
Enter pattern "1001".
:DDEM:SEAR:SYNC:TEXT 'TEST S25'
Enter text for the "GSM_1" pattern.
VSA
Mode:
Manual operation:
See
"Advanced Settings" on page 166
See
See
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SIGNal:PATTern <PatternedSignal>
This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not.
Setting parameters:
<PatternedSignal> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SIGNal[:VALue] <SignalType>
This command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous.
Setting parameters:
<SignalType> CONTinuous | BURSted
*RST: CONTinuous
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Continuous Signal / Burst Signal" on page 151
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
311
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:SRATe <SymbolRate>
This command defines the symbol rate.
Setting parameters:
<SymbolRate> numeric value
For details on the possible values see table 2-1
.
*RST: 3.84e6
Default unit: Hz
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:COMMent <Comment>
This command enters the comment for a new standard. The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu (manual operation). When remote control is used, the string is deleted after the standard has been stored, allowing a new comment to be entered for the next standard. In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made.
Setting parameters:
<Comment> string
Mode:
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:DELete <FileName>
This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis. The file name includes the path. If the file does not exist, an error message is displayed.
Setting parameters:
<FileName> string
File name including the path for the digital standard file
Example:
Usage:
SENS:DDEM:STAN:DEL 'C:\path\standardname'
Setting only
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Digital Standards" on page 113
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:PREset[:VALue]
This command restores the default settings of the currently selected standard.
Usage:
Mode:
Event
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
312
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Manual operation:
See
"Digital Standards" on page 113
See
"Standard Defaults" on page 114
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:SAVE <FileName>
This command stores the current settings of the vector signal analysis as a new userdefined digital standard. If the name of the digital standard is already in use, an error message is output and a new name has to be selected. It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard.
Setting parameters:
<FileName> string
The path and file name to which the settings are stored.
Example:
DDEM:STAN:COMM 'GSM_AccessBurst with Pattern'
Defines a comment for the settings.
DDEM:STAN:SAVE 'C:
\R_S\Instr\usr\standards\USER_GSM'
Stores the settings in the user-defined digital standard
"USER_GSM".
Usage:
Mode:
Setting only
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Digital Standards" on page 113
See
"Save As Standard" on page 113
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:SYNC:OFFSet:STATe <PatternOffsState>
This command (de)activates the pattern offset.
Setting parameters:
<PatternOffsState> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:STANdard:SYNC:OFFSet[:VALue] <PatternOffset>
This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts.
Setting parameters:
<PatternOffset> numeric value
Range: 0 to 15000
*RST: 0
Default unit: SYM
Mode:
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
313
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:ALPHa <Alpha>
This command determines the filter characteristic (ALPHA/BT). The resolution is 0.01.
Setting parameters:
<Alpha> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
0.1 to 1.0
0.22
Default unit: NONE
Mode:
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:NAME <Name>
This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on.
Parameters:
<Name>
Example:
Mode:
Name of the Transmit filter; an overview of available Transmit filters is provided in
.
SENS:DDEM:TFIL:NAME 'RRC'
Selects the RRC filter.
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Transmit filter Type" on page 149
See
"Load User Filter" on page 149
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter[:STATe] <TXFilterState>
Use this command to switch the Transmit filter off. To switch a Transmit filter on, use the
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:NAME
command.
Setting parameters:
<TXFilterState> ON | OFF
OFF
Switches the Transmit filter off.
ON
Switches the Transmit filter specified by
on. However, this command is not necessary, as
the
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:NAME
switches the filter on.
*RST: ON
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:TFIL:STAT OFF
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
314
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
Manual operation:
See
"Transmit filter Type" on page 149
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TFILter:USER <FilterName>
This command selects a user-defined Transmit filter file.
Setting parameters:
<FilterName> The name of the Transmit filter file.
Example:
Mode:
SENS:DDEM:TFIL:NAME 'USER'
Defines the use of a user-defined Transmit filter.
SENS:DDEM:TFIL:USER 'D:\MyTXFilter'
Selects the user-defined filter "MyTXFilter"
VSA
[SENSe]:DDEMod:TIME <ResultLength>
The command determines the number of displayed symbols (result length).
Setting parameters:
<ResultLength> numeric value
Range:
*RST:
10 to 10000 (FMR-7) / 20000 (FMR-9), depending on CPU board; indicated in "SETUP > System Info >
Hardware Info"
800
Default unit: SYM
Example:
DDEM:TIME 80
Sets result length to 80 symbols.
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe]:DDEMod:UQAM:FORMat <Name>
This command selects the type of UserQAM demodulation.
Setting parameters:
<Name> string
Name of the UserQAM demodulation
Example:
Mode:
DDEM:FORM UQAM
Selects user QAM demodulation.
DDEM:UQAM:FORM '32ary'
Selects 32ary user QAM name.
DDEM:MAPP 'DVB_S2_32APSK_34'
Selects the mapping DVB_S2_32APSK_34.
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
315
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe]:DDEMod:UQAM:NSTate?
This command returns the order of the active UserQAM.
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
VSA
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer <Frequency>
This command defines the center frequency (frequency domain) or measuring frequency
(time domain).
Parameters:
<Frequency> Range:
*RST:
0 to fmax fmax/2
Default unit: Hz f max
is specified in the data sheet. min span is 10 Hz
Example:
FREQ:CENT 100 MHz
Manual operation:
See
See
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP <StepSize>
This command defines the center frequency step size.
Parameters:
<StepSize> Range:
*RST:
1 to fmax
0.1 x <span value>
Default unit: Hz
Example:
FREQ:CENT:STEP 120 MHz
Manual operation:
See
[SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO <State>
This command links the step width to the current standard (ON) or sets the step width entered using the FREQ:CENT:STEP command (OFF) (see
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: ON
FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON
Activates the coupling of the step size to the span.
Manual operation:
See
"Stepsize Auto/Man" on page 115
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
316
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SENSe subsystem
[SENSe:]FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
This command defines the frequency offset.
Parameters:
<Offset> Range:
*RST:
-100 GHz to 100 GHz
0 Hz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ
Manual operation:
See
"Frequency Offset" on page 115
[SENSe]:SWEep:COUNt[:VALue] <SweepCount>
This command sets the statistics count. Entering 0 as a parameter activates "Auto" mode.
Entering a number greater than 0 activates "Manual" mode and sets the statistics count to the corresponding number.
For more information see
●
"Statistics Count" on page 123
Setting parameters:
<SweepCount> numeric value
Range: 0 to 32767
*RST: 0
Default unit: NONE
Example:
Usage:
INIT:CONT ON
Activates continuous sweep mode.
SWE:COUN 0
Records the I/Q data continuously and uses a sliding window length for averaging of 10.
INIT:CONT OFF
Activates single sweep mode
SWE 5
Records I/Q data until 5 evaluations have finished.
SCPI confirmed
Mode:
VSA
Manual operation:
See
"Statistics Count" on page 123
[SENSe]:SWEep:COUNt:CURRent <Counter>
This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated. For results that use the capture buffer as a source, the number of used capture buffers can be queried.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
317
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<Counter> CAPTure | STATistics
STATistics
Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated.
CAPTure
Returns the number of used capture buffers evaluated.
*RST: STATistics
Mode:
VSA
4.12 STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
The following commands can be used to query the contents of the status registers specific to the R&S
FSV-K70 option.
For details see
chapter 5, "Status Reporting System (Option R&S
...................................................................................318
.....................................................................................319
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:ENABle
...............................................................319
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:CONDition?
.........................................................319
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>[:EVENt]?
........................................321
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:CONDition?
....................................321
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:ENABle?
........................................322
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:NTRansition?
..................................322
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:PTRansition? ..................................323
QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition
.......................................................................324
QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition
.......................................................................324
QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
...........................................................................324
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition
This command queries the CONDition part of the "STATus:QUEStionable" register. This part contains the sum bit of the next lower register. This register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition part.
Example:
Mode:
STAT:QUES:COND?
all
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
318
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This command queries the contents of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable register. The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it is the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be read by the user.
Reading the register clears it.
Example:
Usage:
Mode:
STAT:QUES?
Query only all
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:ENABle <Enable>
Determines whether the EVENt bit of the STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> register contributes to the sum bit of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<Enable>
0
the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
1
if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well
Usage:
Mode:
SCPI confirmed all
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:CONDition?
Contains the sum bit of the next lower register
(STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>). Its contents reflect the evaluation status. This register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>[:EVENt]?
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it is the
"memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters.
It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be read by the user.
Reading the register clears it.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
319
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
Possible events (limit violations) are described in
chapter 5.3, "STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> Register" , on page 334.
Suffix:
<n>
Usage:
.
1..4
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:NTRansition <NTransition>
This bit acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part of the
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> register is changed from 1 to 0, the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<NTransition>
0
the EVENt bit is not set
1
the EVENt bit is set
Usage:
Mode:
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:PTRansition <PTransition>
This bit acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part of the
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> register is changed from 0 to 1, the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
Setting parameters:
<PTransition>
0
the EVENt bit is not set
1
the EVENt bit is set
Usage:
Mode:
SCPI confirmed
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
320
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>[:EVENt]?
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred in the evaluation of the selected result type since the last reading. It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be read by the user.
Reading the register clears it.
Possible events (limit violations) are described for the individual result types in chapter 5,
"Status Reporting System (Option R&S
Suffix:
<n>
<ResultType>
.
1..4
CFRequency | EVM | FSK | IQRHo | MAGNitude | PHASe
CFRequency = limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation
EVM = limit violations in EVM evaluation
FSK = limit violations in FSK evaluation
IQRHo = limit violations in I/Q-Offset and RHO evaluation
MAGNitude = limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation
PHASe = limit violations in Phase Error evaluation
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:CONDition?
Contains the result of the limit check during evaluation. This register part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Readout does not delete the contents of the CON-
Dition section.
Suffix:
<n>
<ResultType>
.
1..4
CFRequency | EVM | FSK | IQRHo | MAGNitude | PHASe
CFRequency = limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation
EVM = limit violations in EVM evaluation
FSK = limit violations in FSK evaluation
IQRHo = limit violations in I/Q-Offset and RHO evaluation
MAGNitude = limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation
PHASe = limit violations in Phase Error evaluation
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
321
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:ENABle? <Mode>
Determines whether the EVENt bit of the associated status register for the result type contributes to the sum bit of the STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation register. Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated ENABle bit. The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the event sum bit via an "OR" function.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
<ResultType>
Setting parameters:
<Mode>
0
the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
1
if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well
Usage:
CFRequency | EVM | FSK | IQRHo | MAGNitude | PHASe
CFRequency = limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation
EVM = limit violations in EVM evaluation
FSK = limit violations in FSK evaluation
IQRHo = limit violations in I/Q-Offset and RHO evaluation
MAGNitude = limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation
PHASe = limit violations in Phase Error evaluation
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:NTRansition? <Mode>
This bit acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part of the associated status register for the result type is changed from 1 to 0, the NTR bit decides whether the
EVENt bit is set to 1.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
<ResultType> CFRequency | EVM | FSK | IQRHo | MAGNitude | PHASe
CFRequency = limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation
EVM = limit violations in EVM evaluation
FSK = limit violations in FSK evaluation
IQRHo = limit violations in I/Q-Offset and RHO evaluation
MAGNitude = limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation
PHASe = limit violations in Phase Error evaluation
Setting parameters:
<Enable>
0
the EVENt bit is not set
1
the EVENt bit is set
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
322
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:<ResultType>:PTRansition? <Mode>
This bit acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDition part of the associated status register for the result type is changed from 0 to 1, the PTR bit decides whether the
EVENt bit is set to 1.
Suffix:
<n>
<ResultType>
.
1..4
CFRequency | EVM | FSK | IQRHo | MAGNitude | PHASe
CFRequency = limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation
EVM = limit violations in EVM evaluation
FSK = limit violations in FSK evaluation
IQRHo = limit violations in I/Q-Offset and RHO evaluation
MAGNitude = limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation
PHASe = limit violations in Phase Error evaluation
Setting parameters:
<Enable>
0
the EVENt bit is not set
1
the EVENt bit is set
Usage:
Mode:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
VSA
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition? <ChannelName>
This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register.
The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section.
Query parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
Usage:
Query only
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:ENABle <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
This command controls the ENABle part of a register.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
323
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem
The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit. If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true, a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level.
Parameters:
<SumBit>
<ChannelName>
Range: 0 to 65535
String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:NTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register.
The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register.
Parameters:
<SumBit>
<ChannelName>
Range: 0 to 65535
String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:PTRansition <SumBit>,<ChannelName>
These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register.
Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register.
The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register.
Parameters:
<SumBit>
<ChannelName>
Range: 0 to 65535
String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]? <ChannelName>
This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register.
The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section.
Query parameters:
<ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel.
The parameter is optional. If you omit it, the command works for the currently active channel.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
324
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
SYSTem Subsystem
4.13 SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <State>
In remote control mode, this command switches on or off the instrument display. If switched on, only the diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed and updated.
The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote control.
Parameters:
<State>
Example:
ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
SYST:DISP:UPD ON
4.14 TRACe subsystem
............................................................................................326
TRACe<n>[:DATA] <Trace>
This command queries the trace data.
The data the R&S
FSV returns for each result display is as follows:
● Capture Buffer
For the Capture Buffer result display, the command returns the y-axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer. The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the oversampling rate. For example, a capture buffer of 500 in combination with an oversampling rate of 4 would return 2000 level values.
The unit is dBm.
● Cartesian diagrams
For cartesian diagrams, the command returns the Y values of the trace only (magnitude, phase, frequency, real/imag, eye diagrams). The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the Points per Symbol. The unit depends on the unit you have set previously. You can query the x value that relates to the first value
DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X[:SCALe]:STARt? on page 262.
When querying the results for eye diagrams, the results are merely superimposed in the display. This means that the eye diagram result displays are the same as the real/ imag result display.
● Polar diagrams
For polar diagrams, the command returns a pair of values for each trace point. The first value is the real part, the second value the imaginary part. The number of returned value pairs is the product of evaluation range length and points per symbol for the Vector I/Q result display and the evaluation range length for the Constellation
I/Q result display.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
325
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
TRACe subsystem
The Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency result display return one value for each trace point on the y-axis.
● Symbols
For the symbol table result diagrams, the command returns one value for each number in the table. The command always returns the values in the decimal format. The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected.
● Eye diagram
● For eye diagrams, the command returns one value for each sample. The number of returned values is the product of evaluation range length and points per symbol.
● Result Summary
For the Result Summary, the command returns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom. The order of the results is as follows:
<result1_current>, <result1_mean>, <result1_peak>, <result1_stddev>,
<result1_95%ile>, <result2_current>, <result2_mean>, (...)
Empty cells in the table return nothing. The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected. PSK, MSK and QAM modulation returns
53 values, FSK modulation returns 42 values. The unit of each value depends on the particular result.
Suffix:
<n>
.
1..4
screen number
Setting parameters:
<Trace> TRACe1 | TRACe2 | TRACe3 | TRACe4 | TRACe5 | TRACe6 |
TRACe1R | TRACe1I | TRACe2R | TRACe2I | TRACe3R |
TRACe3I | TRACeIQCX | TRACeIQCY
TRACe1/2/3/4/5/6
The complete data from the corresponding trace.
TRACe1R/TRACe2R/TRACe3R
The real data from the corresponding trace. The parameters are available for the Real/Imaginary result types.
TRACe1I/TRACe2I/TRACe3I
The imaginary data from the corresponding trace. The parameters are available for the Real/Imaginary result types.
Example:
Mode:
TRAC? TRACE1
Queries data from trace 1.
VSA
TRACe:IQ:WBANd[:STATe] <State>
Activates or deactivates the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160, if installed.
Sample rates higher than 128
MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth extension.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
326
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
TRIGger subsystem
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
ON
If the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160 is installed and
Thus, sample rates up to 1.28 GHz and an I/Q bandwidth up to
160 MHz are possible.
Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spurious effects.
OFF
If deactivated, the wideband extension is not used; the analysis bandwidth is restricted to 40
MHz. However, possible spurious effects are reduced.
*RST: ON (if B160 available)
Manual operation:
See
"Maximum Bandwidth" on page 159
4.15 TRIGger subsystem
........................................................................327
....................................................................328
.........................................................................328
.....................................................................................329
..................................................................................329
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:BBPower <Level>
This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source (for digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S
FSV-B17).
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Level>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
-50 dBm to +20 dBm
-20 DBM
TRIG:LEV:BB -30DBM
Mode:
All
Manual operation:
See
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
327
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
TRIGger subsystem
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:BBPower:HOLDoff <Value>
This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event (for digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface, R&S
FSV-B17).
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Value> *RST: 150 ns
Example:
Mode:
TRIG:SOUR BBP
Sets the baseband power trigger source.
TRIG:BBP:HOLD 200 ns
Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
all
Manual operation:
See
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <TriggerLevel>
This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event. Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed. If defined, a reference level offset is also considered.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<TriggerLevel>
.
irrelevant
*RST: -20 dBm
Example:
TRIG:LEV:IFP -30DBM
Manual operation:
See
See
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff <Value>
This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Value>
Example:
.
irrelevant
*RST: 150 ns
TRIG:SOUR IFP
Sets the IF power trigger source.
TRIG:IFP:HOLD 200 ns
Sets the holding time to 200 ns.
Manual operation:
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
328
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
TRIGger subsystem
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HYSTeresis <Value>
This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Value>
Example:
.
irrelevant
*RST: 3 dB
TRIG:SOUR IFP
Sets the IF power trigger source.
TRIG:IFP:HYST 10DB
Sets the hysteresis limit value.
Manual operation:
See
"Trigger Hysteresis" on page 161
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff[:TIME] <Delay>
This command defines the length of the trigger delay.
A negative delay time (pretrigger) can be set in zero span only.
Suffix:
<n>
.
irrelevant
Parameters:
<Delay> Range:
*RST: zero span: -sweeptime (see data sheet) to 30 s; span:
0 to 30 s
0 s
Example:
TRIG:HOLD 500us
Manual operation:
See
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <Type>
This command selects the slope of the trigger signal. The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Type>
.
irrelevant
POSitive | NEGative
*RST: POSitive
Example:
TRIG:SLOP NEG
Manual operation:
See
"Trigger Polarity" on page 130
TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce <Source>
This command selects the trigger source.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
329
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Remote Control Commands - R&S
FSV-K70
TRIGger subsystem
IF power and RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option R&S
FSV-B160.
For details on trigger modes refer to the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey in the base unit description.
Suffix:
<n>
Parameters:
<Source>
.
irrelevant
IMMediate
Free Run
EXTern
External trigger
IFPower
Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency
BBPower
Baseband power (for digital input via the R&S Digital I/Q Interface,
R&S
FSV-B17)
*RST: IMMediate
Example:
TRIG:SOUR EXT
Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal
Manual operation:
See
See
See
"IF Power/ Baseband Power" on page 129
See
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
330
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
5 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-
K70)
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument, e.g. information on errors or limit violations which have occurred. This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue. The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus.
In this section, only the new and altered status registers/bits for the VSA option
(R&S
FSV-K70) are described. Detailed information on the status registers of the base system is given in the section "Status Reporting System" in chapter 5 of the Operating
Manual on CD.
Description of the Status Registers
In addition to the registers provided by the base system, the following registers are used in the VSA option (R&S
FSV-K70):
● STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC<n> - contains application-specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n> – provides information on any limit violations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:EVM - limit violations in EVM evaluation
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:PHASe - limit violations in Phase Error evaluation
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:MAGnitude - limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:CFRequency - limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:IQRHO - limit violations in I/Q-Offset and RHO evaluation
● STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:FSK - limit violations in FSK evaluation
The status of the STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the "STATus:QUESTionable" register. It can be queried using the
command.
The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in
chapter 4.12, "STATus:QUEStionable Subsystem" , on page 318.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
331
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
15
14
DigitalIQ
= logical OR of all bits
0
= specific for FSV-K70.
13
12 ACPLimit
11
SYNC
STAT:QUES:SYNC
10
LMARgin
9
8
LIMit
CALibration
(=UNCAL)
MODulation
7
+
15
14
15
6
13
14
5
FREQuency
12
FDEPeak
13
4
TEMPerature
3
11 FDEMean
12
POWer
10
FDECurrent
11
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
9
10
STB
15
8
9
0
STATus:QUEStionable
+
14
13
7
6
PFEPeak
PFEMean
8
7 PIQOffset
12
5 PFECurrent
6 MIQOffset
11
4
5 CIQOffset
10
3
4
9
2 RFEPeak
3
8
1 RFEMean
2
PRHo
7
0
RFECurrent
1
MRHo
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FSK
IQRHo
0
+
STAT:QUES:MOD:FSK
+
STAT:QUES:MOD:IQRH
CFRequency
STAT:QUES:MOD:CFR
MAGNitude
STAT:QUES:MOD:MAGN
PHASe
STAT:QUES:MOD:PHAS
EVM
STAT:QUES:MOD:EVM
CRHo
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<1|2|3|4>
PEAK
MEAN
CURRent
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
+
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
15
14
13
12
11
2
1
0
+
15
...
2
1 SYNC
BURSt 0
+
+
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
PPEak
PMEan
PCURrent
RPEak
RMEan
RCURrent
+
Fig. 5-1: Overview of VSA-specific status registers
5.1
5.2
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC<n> Register............................................................334
5.3
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> Register..................................................334
5.4
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:EVM Register........................................335
5.5
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:PHASe Register....................................335
5.6
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:MAGnitude Register.............................336
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
332
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
STATus:QUEStionable Register
5.7
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:CFRequency Register..........................336
5.8
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:IQRHO Register....................................336
5.9
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:FSK Register.........................................337
5.1 STATus:QUEStionable Register
6
7
This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the instrument is operated without meeting the specifications or defined limits. It can be read using the commands
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition
.
Table 5-1: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register
Bit No.
Meaning
0 to 2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
These bits are not used
POWer
This bit is set if a questionable power occurs (see STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register).
TEMPerature
This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs.
FREQuency
The bit is set if a frequency is questionable (see STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register).
Not used
MODulation
CALibration
The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned ("UNCAL" display)
LIMit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit value is violated (see STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register)
LMARgin (device-specific)
This bit is set if a margin is violated (see STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin register)
SYNC (device-specific)
This bit is set if, in measurements or pre-measurements, synchronization to midamble fails or no burst is found. This bit is also set if, in pre-measurements mode, the result differs too strongly from the expected value.
ACPLimit (device-specific)
This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see
STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register)
Not used
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
333
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC<n> Register
Bit No.
Meaning
14 Digital I/Q (device-specific)
This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the R&S Digital I/Q Interface (R&S
FSV-B17 option), see STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register
15 This bit is always 0.
5.2 STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC<n> Register
This register contains application-specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channel. It can be queried
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC:CONDition?
STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC[:EVENt]?
Table 5-2: Status error bits in STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register for R&S
FSV-K70
Bit Definition
0
1
2 to 14
15
Burst not found.
This bit is set if a burst could not be detected.
Sync not found
This bit is set if the sync sequence (pattern) of the midamble could not be detected.
Not used.
This bit is always 0.
5.3 STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n> Register
This register comprises information about any limit violations that may occur after demodulation in any of the four windows. It can be queried with commands
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:CONDition?
QUEStionable:MODulation<n>[:EVENt]?
2
3
Bit No
0
1
4
5
6-15
Meaning
Error in EVM evaluation
Error in Phase Error evaluation
Error in Magnitude Error evaluation
Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation
Error in I/Q offset or RHO evaluation
Error in FSK evaluation
These bits are not used
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
334
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:EVM Register
5.4 STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:EVM Register
This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM evaluation. It can be queried with commands
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:EVM:CONDition and
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:EVM[:EVENt].
5
6
7
8-15
Bit No
0
1
2
3-4
Meaning
Error in current RMS value
Error in mean RMS value
Error in peak RMS value
These bits are not used
Error in current peak value
Error in mean peak value
Error in peak peak value
These bits are not used
5.5 STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:PHASe Register
This register comprises information about limit violations in Phase Error evaluation. It can be queried with commands
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:PHASe:CONDition and
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:PHASe[:EVENt].
5
6
7
8-15
Bit No
0
1
2
3-4
Meaning
Error in current RMS value
Error in mean RMS value
Error in peak RMS value
These bits are not used
Error in current peak value
Error in mean peak value
Error in peak peak value
These bits are not used
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
335
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:MAGnitude Register
5.6 STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:MAGnitude
Register
This register comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation.
It can be queried with commands
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:MAGNitude:CONDition and
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:MAGNitude[:EVENt].
3-4
5
6
7
8-15
1
2
Bit No
0
Meaning
Error in current RMS value
Error in mean RMS value
Error in peak RMS value
These bits are not used
Error in current peak value
Error in mean peak value
Error in peak peak value
These bits are not used
5.7 STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:CFRequency
Register
This register comprises information about limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation.
It can be queried with commands
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:CFREQuency:CONDition and
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:CFREQuency[:EVENt].
Bit No
0
1
2
3-15
Meaning
Error in current value
Error in mean value
Error in peak value
These bits are not used
5.8 STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:IQRHO Register
This register comprises information about limit violations in I/Q offset or RHO evaluation.
It can be queried with commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
336
R&S
®
FSV-K70 Status Reporting System (Option R&S
FSV-K70)
STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:FSK Register
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:IQRHO:CONDition and
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:IQRHO[:EVENt].
3-4
5
6
7
8-15
1
2
Bit No
0
Meaning
Error in current RHO value
Error in mean RHO value
Error in peak RHO value
These bits are not used
Error in current I/Q offset value
Error in mean I/Q offset value
Error in peak I/Q offset value
These bits are not used
5.9 STATus:QUESTionable:MODulation<n>:FSK Register
This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation. It can be queried with commands
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:FSK:CONDition and
STATus:QUEStionable:MODulation<n>:FSK[:EVENt].
5
6
7
8-9
10
11
12
13-15
Bit No
0
1
2
3-4
Meaning
Error in current Frequency Error RMS value
Error in mean Frequency Error RMS value
Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value
These bits are not used
Error in current Frequency Error peak value
Error in mean Frequency Error peak value
Error in peak Frequency Error peak value
These bits are not used
Error in current Frequency Deviation value
Error in mean Frequency Deviation value
Error in peak Frequency Deviation value
These bits are not used
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
337
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
6 Support
The "R&S Support" softkey in the SAVE/RCL > "Export" menu stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors.
This data is stored in the C:\R_S\Instr\user\Support directory on the instrument.
The SupportSave.dfl file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later. (Remember to set the sweep mode to "Single Sweep" beforehand, as "Continuous Sweep" would immediately overwrite the loaded input data.)
If you contact the Rohde&Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem, send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster.
6.1 Explanation of Error Messages
The following section describes error messages and possible causes.
Message: 'Burst Not Found'
The "Burst Not Found" error message can have several causes:
● Burst search is active, but the signal is not bursted
Fig. 6-1: Example for active burst search with continuous signal
Solution: Select "Continuous Signal" as the signal type.
For more information, see
–
"Signal Description" on page 150.
● Signal is bursted, but bursts have not been captured completely
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
338
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
The burst search can only find bursts that start and end within the capture buffer. It ignores bursts that are cut off.
Fig. 6-2: Example for incomplete burst capture
Solution: Change the trigger settings and/or enlarge the capture length.
For more information, see
–
● The current measurement is being performed on a burst that has not been
captured completely.
Fig. 6-3: Example for measurement on incomplete burst capture
Fig. 6-4: Example for measurement on complete burst capture
Solution:
Change the trigger settings or increase the result length.
Note, however, that in this case, the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored.
● The settings do not match the signal
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
339
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
In order to allow you to select certain bursts, the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between "Min Length" and "Max Length" (plus a tolerance that you can set in the "Burst Search" Dialog). In case the burst is, e.g. shorter than the "Burst
Min Length", the burst search fails.
Fig. 6-5: Example for a failed burst search due too a burst that is too short
Solution: try one of the following:
– Switch on the Magnitude (Capture Buffer) result display. Move a marker to the start of the burst. Move a delta marker to the end of the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the "Signal Description" dialog.
– Increase the search tolerance in the "Burst Search" dialog. Keep an eye on the green/red field. If the burst search succeeds, you can see the length of the found bursts.
– Set the minimum burst length to 50 and the maximum burst length to 5000.
For more information, see:
–
"Signal Description" on page 150
–
chapter 3.2.9, "Softkeys of the Marker Menu (R&S
–
● The signal is highly distorted and/or has modulation noise
One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the minimum gap length. If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced, it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
340
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
Fig. 6-6: Example for adjusting the minimum gap length
For more information, see
● The pattern search is switched on, fails and the alignment is with reference to
the pattern.
In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern (and not the burst), a non-detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer. Hence, if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of the capture buffer, you will see a "Burst Not Found" Message.
Solution:
–
Refer to
"Message: 'Pattern Not Found'" on page 341
– Switch the pattern search off.
– Choose "Burst" as the reference for the result range alignment.
Message: 'Pattern Not Found'
The "Pattern Not Found" error message can have several causes:
● The burst search has failed
If burst and pattern search are active, the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts. Hence, in case the burst search fails, the pattern search will also fail.
Solution: Try one of the following:
– Make sure the burst search is successful.
– Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search active.
For more information, see
–
"Message: 'Burst Not Found'" on page 338
● The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set
It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the pattern search. The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst. However, if the entered offset is not correct (within about 4 symbols of tolerance), the pattern will not be found.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
341
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
Fig. 6-7: GSM EDGE burst; Pattern is actually located in the middle of the burst. The correct value for "Offset" here would be 58.
Solution: Try one of the following:
– Remove the offset ('unknown').
– Enter the correct offset (within about 4 symbols of tolerance).
For more information, see
–
"Signal Description" on page 150
● The specified pattern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal:
In the R&S FSQ-K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time.
For example, in a GSM measurement, the capture buffer can be checked for all TSCs simultaneously. This is not possible in the R&S
FSV-K70.
Solution:
Make sure that the correct pattern is specified in the "Signal Description" dialog.
For more information, see
–
"Signal Description" on page 150
Message: 'Result Alignment Failed'
The result range alignment is not possible for the patricular capture buffer. The result range needs I/Q data that has not been captured.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
342
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
Fig. 6-8: Example for failed alignment
In this screenshot, the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not possible because there are not enough samples in the capture buffer before the burst starts. In this scenario, the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer.
Solution: Change the trigger settings and/or enlarge the capture length.
For more information, see:
●
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
343
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
Message: 'Pattern Search On, But No Pattern Selected'
Fig. 6-9: The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern
Solution: Select an existing pattern (or create a new pattern) that you expect to be within the signal.
For more information, see
●
"Signal Description" on page 150
chapter 3.3.5, "Working with Pattern Searches" , on page 194
Message: 'Pattern Not (Entirely) Within Result Range
A pattern can only be found, if it is entirely within the result range. Therefore, this error message always occurs with a "Pattern Not Found" error.
Solution: Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment. Then, the pattern will be forcefully part of your result range and the pattern search can succeed.
For more information, see
●
●
chapter 3.3.2, "Defining the Result Range" , on page 186
Message: 'Short Pattern: Pattern Search Might Fail'
The R&S
FSV performs the pattern search in two stages.
● Stage 1 involves the generation of an I/Q pattern waveform by modulating the pattern symbol sequence. The I/Q pattern is then correlated with the measured signal. At
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
344
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages positions where the correlation metric exceeds the "I/Q Correlation Threshold" the I/
Q pattern is found.
● Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the I/Q pattern location and the transmitted symbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence.
In case of a very short pattern, i.e. a pattern length in the order of the inter-symbol interference (ISI) duration, a number of issues can arise:
● False positive
The I/Q pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols.
Solution: Try one of the following:
– Activate "Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct".
– Increase the "I/Q Correlation Threshold"
(see "I/Q Correlation Threshold" on page 165).
● False negative
The I/Q pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pattern symbols.
Solution:
– Decrease the "I/Q Correlation Threshold"
(see "I/Q Correlation Threshold" on page 165).
In case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the I/
Q pattern within each burst. If a false positive occurs in this situation (cf. case 1.) the use of "Meas only if pattern symbols correct" will not provide a satisfactory solution.
In this case do the following:
– Increase the "I/Q Correlation Threshold".
– Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the
"Offset" parameter.
Message: 'Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols'
Note: Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem. Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and/ or better measurement results by improving your setup.
Synchronization in the R&S
FSV-K70 is performed in two stages: coarse synchronization that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal.
● The coarse synchronization stage can work data-aided (i.e. based on a known pattern) or non-data-aided (i.e. based on the unknown data symbols). The default is a non-data-aided coarse synchronization. In the case that a pattern is part of signal, the user can switch to data-aided synchronization.
● The fine synchronization stage always works data-aided.
'Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols' indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robust.
The message is given if
● Coarse Synchronization = Non-Data-Aided (User Pattern for Sync = Off):
Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols
(see
chapter 2.6.1.2, "Estimation" , on page 57)
● Fine Synchronization:
Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols
(see
chapter 2.6.1.2, "Estimation" , on page 57)
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
345
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Explanation of Error Messages
Solution:
● If the signal contains a pattern, set "Coarse Synchronization: Pattern".
(see
"Coarse Synchronization" on page 176).
Example: measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols.
Fig. 6-10: User Pattern for Sync = Off
Fig. 6-11: User Pattern for Sync = On
● Choose a longer "Result Range".
● If the signal is bursted and the bursts are short:
– Make sure your "Result Range" comprises the entire burst.
– Make sure that "Run-In/Out" is not chosen too large, since the "Run-In/Out" ranges are excluded from the synchronization.
● If the signal is bursted and contains a pattern:
Only switch off the burst search if absolutely necessary. If you need to switch it off, align your "Result Range" to the pattern, make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose "Continuous Signal" as the "Signal Type" in the "Signal Description" dialog.
For more information, see
●
chapter 2.5, "Demodulation Overview" , on page 47
Message: 'Sync Prefers Longer Pattern'
This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data-aided, i.e is based on a known pattern. In case the pattern is very short, pattern-based coarse synchronization might be unstable. If demodulation is stable, e.g. you get a reasonable EVM, there is no need to change anything. Otherwise, you have two options:
● Switch to the non-pattern-based mode by setting the parameter "Coarse Synchronization: Data "
(see
"Coarse Synchronization" on page 176
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
346
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Flow Chart for Troubleshooting
● If possible, use a longer pattern.
For more information, see
●
chapter 2.5, "Demodulation Overview" , on page 47
Message: 'Result Ranges Overlap'
This message does not indicate an error. It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap. Thus, some captured data is evaluated more than once. For example, the same peak value may be listed several times if it is included in several result ranges, and averaging is performed on (partially) duplicate values. However, a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected.
6.2 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting
If you experience a concrete measurement problem, you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow-chart.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
347
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Flow Chart for Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Overview
Press Preset
(in order to start from a known state)
Check the following parameters (at the DUT and the K70):
- Center frequency
- Reference Level, overload
- Symbol rate
- Transmit filter
- Modulation Type
- Input (RF, Baseband)
- Sideband inversion (Swap IQ)
Demodulation Failed
Indications are (e.g.):
- Sync Failed/Unstable Message in the Status Bar
- The measurement I/Q Constellation does not look at all like a constellation
Check the measurement:
Mag(CapBuffer)
To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed, switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it.
1
Is the colored bar (=„Result Range“) in a range where you expect the signal to have the set modulation ?
yes
Press the „SWEEP“ Hardkey and set the statistic count to
„1". Then, press „Single Sweep“. The FSV will stop capturing IQ data, which makes it easier for you to debug.
yes
Is your signal bursted?
no
Try to increase „Run-In“ and
„Run-Out“ in the „Signal
Description“ dialog
Please refer to the „Error
Messages“ section in the manual yes
Do you see a „Sync prefers more valid symbols“ Message?
This can be problematic. If you have a pattern, you can try to use it for synchronization, i.e. use the setting „Coarse Synchronization: Pattern“.
no no
Do you transmit uncorrelated random bits on the physical level?
yes no
Can you increase the length
of your „Result Range“? E.g. is your burst actually larger?
yes
Increase the „Result Range“ to at least 8xModulation
Order.
Go back to
1 no
Is your „Result Range“ larger than ~8xModulation Order, e.g.
8x4=32 for QPSK?
yes
Hard to find the origin of the problem.
It might be that:
- Your DUT suffers from massive impairments.
- Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error.
- The adjacent channel power is very high.
no
See part 2
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
348
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions no
From 1 yes
Is your signal bursted?
yes no
Make sure your „Signal Type“ in the „Signal Description“ dialog is a „Burst Signal“
Does your signal contain a pattern?
yes
Does this pattern matter to you?
E.g. do you want to align your result
to the pattern or check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly?
yes
Make sure the pattern is indicated in the „Signal
Description“ dialog
Make sure the burst search is switched on in the „Burst
Search“ dialog
Make sure the pattern search is switched on.
no no
Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types?
yes
Use the parameter „Offset“ and
„Result Length“ in the „Result Range
Setting“ dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer.
no
Messages“ section in the manual
Do you see a „Burst Not
Found“ Message?
no
Make sure your
„Result Range Alignment“ reference is „Burst“.
(Range Setting Dialog)
Please refer to the „Error
Do you see a „Pattern Not
Found“ Message?
no
Make sure your
„Result Range Alignment“ reference is „Pattern Waveform“.
(Range Setting Dialog) yes
Go back to
1
Use an external trigger and an appropriate trigger offset.
Go back to
Please refer to the „Error
Messages“ section in the manual
1
6.3 Frequently Asked Questions
Problem: The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement screen .................350
Problem: The measurement screen does not show average results ..........................350
Problem: The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain ............................351
..............................352
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
349
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
Problem: the MSK/FSK signal demodulates on the R&S FSQ-K70, but not on the R&S
Question: Why isn't the FSK Deviation Error in R&S FSV-K70 identical to the FSK DEV
.........................................................................................355
Problem: The PSK/QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display
.........................................................................356
.............................................................................................356
Question: Why do the EVM results for my FSK-modulated signal look wrong?
Problem: The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement screen
Solution:
● 1. Press the
key to select the measurement screen.
● 2. Press the AUTO key.
● 3. Press the "Y-Axis Auto Range" softkey.
Problem: The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement screen; the trace of the reference signal is not
Solution:
● 1. Press the
key to select the measurement screen.
● 2. Press the TRACE key.
● 3. Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.
● 4. Select a second trace, choose "Clear Write" as "Trace Mode" and toggle to "Ref" in the "Evaluation" column.
Problem: The measurement screen does not show average results
Solution:
● 1. Press the
key to select the measurement screen.
● 2. Press the TRACE key.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
350
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
● 3. Press the "Trace Wizard" softkey.
● 4. Select a second trace and choose the preferred "Trace Mode", e.g. "Max Hold" or
"Average".
Problem: The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain
Solution:
● 1. Press the
key to select the measurement screen.
● 2. Press the AMPT key.
● 3. Press the "Unit" softkey.
● 4. Press the "Y-Axis Unit" softkey.
● 5. Select dB.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
351
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
Problem: The Vector I/Q result display and the Constellation I/Q result display look different
Reason:
● The Vector I/Q diagram shows the measurement signal after the measurement filter and synchronization.
● The Constellation I/Q diagram shows the de-rotated constellation (i.e. for a π/4-
DQPSK, 4 instead of 8 points are displayed). The inter-symbol interference has been removed.
In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter-symbol interference, the screens show measurements that are significantly different.
Problem: The Constellation I/Q measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R&S
FSQ-K70 and the R&S FSV-K70
Reason:
In the FSQ-K70, the Constellation I/Q measurement displays the symbol instants of the
Vector I/Q measurement. Hence, this is a rotated constellation, e.g. for a
π/4-DQPSK, 8 points are displayed.
In the R&S
FSV-K70, the Constellation I/Q diagram shows the de-rotated constellation
(i.e. for a
π/4-DQPSK, 4 instead of 8 points are displayed). The inter-symbol interference has been removed.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
352
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
Note: As of firmware version R&S
FSV 1.70, a new result display ("I/Q Constellation
(Rotated)") is available that displays the rotated constellation, as the FSQ-K70 does.
For details on the Constellation I/Q diagram in the R&S
FSV-K70, see chapter 3.1.1.11,
"Constellation I/Q" , on page 85.
Table 6-1: Constellation I/Q and Vector I/Q for pi/4-DQPSK modulation
R&S FSQ-K70
R&S
FSV-K70
Problem: the MSK/FSK signal demodulates on the R&S FSQ-K70, but not on the
R&S FSV-K70 or: Why do I have to choose different transmit filters in the R&S FSQ-
K70 and the R&S FSV-K70?
When generating an MSK/FSK reference signal, the R&S FSQ-K70 automatically replaces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbol. In the R&S
FSV-K70, however, this "replacement" is part of the transmit filter routine. Thus, the R&S FSQ and the R&S
FSV require different transmit filters for measuring the same FSK/MSK signal.
Example:
● If your transmit filter for the R&S FSQ-K70 was "NONE", you need to choose "Rectangular" as the transmit filter type in the R&S
FSV.
● If your transmit filter for the R&S FSQ-K70 was "GAUSS", you need to choose
"GMSK" as the transmit filter type in the R&S
FSV.
Problem: The EVM trace looks okay, but the EVM in the result summary is significantly different
Solution:
● Make sure that the position of the "Evaluation Lines" is reasonable. The Result Summary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines. Hence, in the case the "Result Range" covers the burst ramps, it is important to adjust the
"Evaluation Range" appropriately.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
353
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
Fig. 6-12: Problem: EVM in result summary does not correspond with trace display
Fig. 6-13: Solution: Result Summary with correct evaluation range setting
● Make sure that the same samples are evaluated. The EVM trace displays (as default) all sample instants, e.g. if the "Capture Oversampling" is 4, the EVM trace shows 4 samples per symbol. The Result Summary does not forcefully evaluate all sample
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
354
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions instants. E.g. for a PSK modulation, as default only symbol instants contribute to the
EVM result.
Question: Why isn't the FSK Deviation Error in R&S FSV-K70 identical to the FSK
DEV ERROR in R&S FSQ-K70?
Solution:
The FSK deviation error in the R&S
FSV-K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user (see
"FSK Ref Deviation" on page 148). What is referred to as the "FSK DEV
ERROR" in the R&S FSQ-K70 is calculated differently (see the R&S FSQ-K70 Software
Manual) and is comparable to the "Freq Err RMS" in the R&S
FSV-K70. However, while the "FSK DEV ERROR" in the R&S FSQ-K70 is given in Hz, the "Freq Err RMS" in the
R&S
FSV-K70 is given in percent, i.e. relative to the "FSK Meas Deviation".
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
355
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
Problem: The PSK/QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display
Solution:
These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero-transitions in the I/Q Plane.
Question: The y-axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be "dB". What level is this relative to?
Answer:
Spectrum (RealImag, Meas&Ref) calculates the FFT of the result RealImag(Meas&Ref).
RealImag(Meas&Ref) has the unit "none". In this case, "none" means the measured signal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding reference signal as well as possible. The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max(abs(at symbol instants))
= 1.0.
Question: How can I get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control?
Answer:
Use the following remote commands:
:SENSe1:DDEMod:PRESet 'GSM_NB'
Load the GSM standard.
:SENSe1:DDEMod:RLENgth 10000 SYM
Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer.
:INITiate1:CONTinuous OFF
Go to single sweep mode.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
356
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Support
Frequently Asked Questions
:SENSe1:SWEep:COUNt 0
Set the "Statistic Count" to "Auto" mode.
:INITiate1:IMMediate
Do single sweep.
:SENSe1:SWEep:COUNt:CURRent?
Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer.
For n = 1:NumberOfBursts
:SENSe1:DDEMod:SEARch:MBURst:CALC n
:TRACe4? TRACe1 'Query the result symbols in screen D
End
Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols.
Question: Why do the EVM results for my FSK-modulated signal look wrong?
Answer:
For an FSK-modulated signal, the signal processing differs to an PSK/QAM/MSK-modulated signal. The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instan-
taneous frequency (see chapter 2.6.2.1, "Error Model" , on page 67). Therefore, the mea-
surement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Frequency Error
(Absolute/Relative). (Source Type: Modulation Error; Result Type: Frequency Error
(Absolute/Relative))
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
357
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
7 Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed formulae and abbreviations
7.1 Formulae
7.1.1 Trace-based Evaluations
The trace-based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the "Display
Points Per Symbol" parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183). The sampling
instants at this rate are referred to as "t" here, i.e.
t=n*T
D where T
D
equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the
"Display Points Per Symbol" parameter.
Test parameter
Error vector
Formula
EV
MEAS
REF
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM)
Magnitude
EVM
EV
C
with the normalization contant C depends on your setting. By default C² is the mean power of the reference signal.
C
1
K
k
REF
2
T
duration of symbol periods
Mag
MEAS
Mag
REF
MEAS
REF
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
358
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Test parameter
Phase
Frequency
Magnitude error
Phase error
Frequency error
Formula
Phase
MEAS
Phase
REF
MEAS
REF
FREQ
MEAS
2
1
FREQ
REF
1
2
d dt
MEAS d dt
REF
MAG
_
ERR
PHASE
_
ERR
MAG
MEAS
MAG
REF
PHASE
MEAS
PHASE
REF
FREQ
_
ERR
FREQ
MEAS
FREQ
REF
FSK Modulation
The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear modulation types. However, as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency, the I/Q based results first require a reconstruc-
The dashed outline of the "compensate" blocks indicate that these operations are optionally (de-)activated depending on the corresponding user settings. With respect to FSK measurements, the optional compensation parameters are:
●
FSK Reference deviation
●
Carrier frequency drift
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
359
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
f
REF
(n )
Figure 3
Compensate:
Ref. deviation
Reference
Frequency
Compensate:
Ref. deviation
Frequency
Modulator
Reference
I/Q
f
MEAS
(n )
Compensate:
Timing
Carrier offset
Compensate:
Carrier drift
Measured
Frequency
Frequency
Modulator
X
Measured
I/Q
A
MEAS
(n )
Compensate:
Timing
Gain
Fig. 7-1: Reconstruction of the reference and measured I/Q waveforms for FSK modulation
Note that a reference deviation error is corrected in the reference frequency trace. This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace corresponds to that of the originally measured signal. With respect to the I/Q reconstruction, the measured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the measured instantaneous frequency. This ensures that the measured magnitude and frequency remain synchronized in the reconstructed I/Q waveform.
7.1.2 Result Summary Evaluations
The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the
"Display Points Per Symbol" parameter (see
"Display Points/Sym" on page 183). This
value can be one of the following:
● "1": only the symbol instant contributes to the result
● "2": two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result
● the "Capture Oversampling" rate (see
"Capture Oversampling" on page 158): all
samples contribute to the result equally
The results are determined by the evaluation range.
The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as "t" here, i.e.
t=n*T
D where T
D
equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the
"Display Points Per Symbol" parameter
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
360
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
7.1.2.1
PSK, QAM and MSK Modulation
For PSK, QAM and MSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter
chapter 2.6.1, "PSK, QAM and MSK Modulation" , on page 56. The parameters of the
PSK, QAM and MSK-specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows:
Table 7-1: Evaluation of results in the PSK, QAM and MSK result summary
EVM RMS
1
N
n
EVM
n
T
D
2
Peak max
EVM
n
T
D
Modulation error
RMS
Peak
20
log
10
1
N
n
EV
n
T
D
2
1
K
k
REF k T
2
min
MER
n
T
D
with MER
n
T
D
20
log
10
1
N
n
EV
n
T
D
2
1
K
k
REF k T
2
Magnitude error
RMS
Peak
1
N
n
MAG
_
ERR
n
T
D
2 max
MAG
_
ERR
n
T
D
Phase error RMS
Peak
1
N
n
PHASE
_
ERR
n
T
D
2 max
PHASE
_
ERR
n
T
D
RHO (correlation coefficient)
n
n
REF
REF
*
MEAS
2
n
MEAS
2
2
KKF
AKF
MEAS
REF
,
REF
AKF
2
MEAS
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
361
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
IQ Offset C
IQ Imbalance
B
Gain Imbalance G
Quadrature
Error
Ɵ
Amplitude
Droop A
C
C
2
c
Q
2
c
I g
I
g
Q
10
1
K
k
REF
2 log
10
B
B
g
I g
I
g
Q g
Q
e j
e j
20
log
10
G
G
g
Q
20
g i
log
10
180
A
A
20
e
T
log
10
dB Sym
7.1.2.2
FSK Modulation
For FSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in section
"FSK Modulation" , on page 65. The parameters of the FSK-specific result summary table
can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows:
Table 7-2: Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary
Frequency Error RMS
1
N
n
FREQ
_
ERR
n
T
D
2
Peak max
FREQ
_
ERR
n
T
D
Magnitude Error RMS
Peak
1
N
n
MAG
_
ERR
n
T
D
2 max
MAG
_
ERR
n
T
D
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
362
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
FSK Deviation Error
ERR
FSK Measurement Deviation
MEAS
FSK Reference Deviation
REF
Carrier Frequency Error
f
0
Carrier Frequency Drift
f d
ERR
MEAS
REF
(
B
1 )
REF
Estimated FSK deviation error [Hz].
MEAS
B
REF
Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal [Hz].
FSK reference deviation as entered by the user [Hz].
f
0
C
2
The carrier frequency error of the measured signal [Hz].
f d
D
2
T
The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal
[Hz/Sym].
7.1.3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary
The statistical evaluations in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the "Current" column. Hence, the index "m" here represents the current evaluation, "M" is the total number of evaluations. In single sweep mode, M coresponds to the statistics count.
If the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain, the linear values are averaged. The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain.
The linear values are indicated by the subscript [lin] in table 7-1 .
Mean
xˆ
M
Mathematical expression
x
M
1
M
m x m
Calculation in R&S
FSV
x
M
M
1
x
M
M
1
x
M
with
x
0
0
Peak
xˆ
M
ˆ
M
x idx
with
idx
arg max
m x m x
M x
M
x
M
if
x
M x
M
1 if
x
M
x
M
1
x
M
1 with
x
0
0
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
363
R&S
®
FSV-K70
StdDev
σ
M
95%ile
x
95 ,
M
Mathematical expression
M
1
M
m
x m
x m
2 with
x
M
1
M
m x m x
95 ,
M
x
Pr
x m
x
0 .
95
Pr() denotes the probability
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Calculation in R&S
FSV
M
M
1
2
M
1
M
x
M
x
M
2 with
0
0
Sorting the values and giving the 95%ile.
7.1.4 Trace Averaging
The index "m" represents the current evaluation, "M" is the total number of evaluations.
In single sweep mode, M coresponds to the statistics count. The index "s" represents the s th sample within the trace.
If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain, the average operation is performed on the linear values. The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain.
RMS Average
x s
,
M
Linear Average
x s
,
M
Measurements
●
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM)
●
Meas/Ref magnitude
●
Capture Buffer magnitude
All measurements where trace averaging is possible except for the measurements listed for RMS averaging
Calculation in R&S
FSV
x s
,
M
M
1
x s
2
,
M
1
M
x
2
s
,
M x s
,
M
M
1
x s
,
M
1
M
x s
,
M
7.1.5 Analytically Calculated Filters
The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
364
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Filter Type Setting Parameter Impulse Response
Raised cosine (RC) Alpha (
⍺)
h
sin
t
t
T
T
1 cos
4
t
T
T t
2
Root raised cosine
(RRC)
Alpha (
⍺)
h
4
cos
1
t
T
1
T
sin
1
4
t
4
t T
2
T
t T
Gaussian filter
(Gauss) ETSI TS
100 959 (V8.3.0)
BT
h
exp
2
t
2
2
T
T
2 with
ln 2
2
BT
7.1.6 Standard-Specific Filters
7.1.6.1
Transmit filter
EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 (V8.1.2) (Linearized GMSK)
c
0
3
i
0
0
S
t
iT
for else
0
t
5T
S
sin
sin
0
2
0
t
g
t
dt
4
T
0
g
'
(
t
' )
dt
'
for for else
0
t
4
T
4
T
t
8
T g
1
2
T
Q
2
0 .
3
t
T
5
T
2 ln
Q
2
0 .
3
t
T
3
T
ln
2
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
365
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Q
1
2
t
e
2
2
d
c
0
(t) is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter
7.1.6.2
Measurement Filter
EDGE Measurement filters
RC filter, Alpha = 0.25, single-side-band 6 dB bandwith = 90 kHz Windowing by multiplying the impulse response according to the following equation:
w
1 ,
0
0 ,
.
5
1
cos
t
1 .
5
T
2 .
25
T
,
0
t
1 .
5
T
1 .
5
T t
t
3 .
75
T
3 .
75
T
The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard-specific measurement filters.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
366
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
367
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Low-ISI Filters
The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low-ISI measurment filter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
368
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
369
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
370
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Formulae
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
371
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Abbreviations
7.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R&S
FSV-K70 option.
Abbreviation
FSK
ISI
Meaning See section
Frequency Shift Keying
Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted in the frequency.
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)
Inter-symbol Interference
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
372
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Abbreviation
ISI-free demodulation
MEAS filter
MSK
NDA Demodulator
PSK
QAM
RMS
RX filter
Transmit filter
VSA
Annex: Formulae and Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Meaning
Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the decision instants after signal-adapted filtering.
Measurement Filter
Weighting filter for the measurement.
Minimum Shift Keying
Modulation mode.
Non Data Aided Demodulator
Demodulation without any knowledge of the sent data contents.
See section
System-Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters
System-Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters
Minimum Shift Keying (MSK)
Demodulation and Algorithms
Phase Shift Keying
Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions.
Phase Shift Keying (PSK)
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase.
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
(QAM)
Root Mean Square
Receive Filter
Baseband filter in analyzer used for signal-adapted filtering.
Averaging RMS Quantities
System-Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters
Transmitter Filter
Digital impulse shaping filter in signal processing unit of transmitter.
System-Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters
Vector Signal Analysis
Measurement at complex modulated RF carriers.
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
373
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
374
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
375
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
376
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
377
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
378
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
379
R&S
®
FSV-K70
List of Commands
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
380
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Index
A
Index
Activating the option ........................................................ 72
Adjust Settings
Softkey .................................................................... 118
Alignment
Result range .......................................................... 171
Alpha/BT ................................................................ 150, 179
Amplitude Droop
Compensation ........................................................ 174
ASCII Trace export ........................................................ 206
ASCII Trace Export
Softkey ............................................................ 128, 144
attenuation
(option B25) ............................................................ 120
Attenuation
(option B25) ............................................................ 120
Automatic ................................................................ 120
Manual ............................................................ 119, 272
Option B25 .............................................................. 119
Attenuation Mode
RF Settings .............................................................. 155
Auto level
Hysteresis ................................................................ 122
Average trace mode .............................................. 126, 206
B
Bandwidth
Extension ................................................................ 159
Maximum ................................................................ 159
Bandwidth extension
Option B160 .............................................................. 13
BER
Restrictions for use .................................................... 14
see Bit error rate ...................................................... 100
Binary
Softkey .................................................................... 118
Bit error rate
Result type .............................................................. 100
Blank trace mode .................................................. 126, 206
Block diagram
I/Q data ...................................................................... 10
Bursts
Length (remote control) .......................................... 302
Useful length ............................................................ 151
Burst Search .................................................................... 49
Activating (remote control) ...................................... 304
Auto configuration .................................................... 163
Enabling .................................................................. 163
Falling edge (remote control) .................................. 303
Gap length .............................................................. 163
Minimum gap (remote control) ................................ 302
Rising edge (remote control) .................................. 303
Softkey .................................................................... 132
Tolerance ................................................................ 163
Tolerance (remote control) ...................................... 304
Burst Signal .................................................................... 151
C
Capture Length
I/Q Capture ...................................................... 157, 158
I/Q Capture (remote control) .................................... 300
Capture Oversampling .................................................. 158
Remote control ........................................................ 295
Capture Unit
Softkey .................................................................... 119
Carrier Frequency Drift
Compensation ........................................................ 174
Center frequency .......................................................... 115
CF Stepsize .................................................................. 115
Characters
Special .................................................................... 210
Clear Write trace mode .......................................... 125, 205
Coarse Synchronization ................................................ 176
Commands
Description .............................................................. 208
Compensation
Demodulation .......................................................... 174
Config ModAcc Limits
Softkey .................................................................... 137
Config Pattern
Softkey .................................................................... 132
Constellation I/Q
Result type ................................................................ 85
Rotated, Result type ................................................ 85
Continuous Signal .......................................................... 151
Continuous sweep ........................................................ 123
Couple Screens (On/Off)
Remote control ...................................................... 238
Softkey .................................................................... 133
D
Decimal
Softkey .................................................................... 118
Default Settings
Softkey .................................................................... 118
Delete Standard
softkey .................................................................... 113
Demod Meas Filter
Softkey .................................................................... 132
Demodulation
Bandwidth .................................................................. 14
Coarse Synchronization .......................................... 176
Compensation ........................................................ 174
Estimation Points per Symbol .................................. 176
Fine Synchronization .............................................. 177
Mode (remote control) .................................... 298, 299
Normalization .......................................................... 175
Offset EVM .............................................................. 176
Order (remote control) ............................................ 299
Demodulation order
Remote control ................................................ 297, 298
Differential PSK (DPSK) .................................................. 26
DigIConf
Softkey .................................................................... 142
Digital Baseband Info
Remote control ........................................................ 280
Digital IQ data
device ...................................................................... 140
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
381
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Index
Digital IQ Info
Remote control ........................................................ 273
Softkey .................................................................... 143
Digital Standards
Softkey .................................................................... 113
Display Configuration
Result Type ............................................................ 181
Result Type Transformation .................................. 182
Softkey ............................................................ 114, 132
Source .................................................................... 181
Display Points/Symbol .................................................. 183
remote control .......................................................... 259
Display range
Frequency ................................................................ 115
E
EDGE filters
Frequency response ................................................ 366
El Attenuation
RF Settings .............................................................. 156
Electronic input attenuation
FSV-B25 .................................................................. 275
Error model
FSK ............................................................................ 67
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM)
Result type ................................................................ 89
Estimation ........................................................................ 57
FSK ............................................................................ 68
Points per Symbol .................................................. 176
Ranges ...................................................................... 57
Evaluation
Range ...................................................................... 172
Range (remote control) ............................................ 248
Range display .......................................................... 109
Refreshing .............................................................. 123
Traces ...................................................................... 127
Evaluation (Meas/Ref)
Remote control ........................................................ 256
Softkey .................................................................... 127
EVM
Result Summary ...................................................... 95
EX-IQ-BOX .................................................................... 141
DigIConf .................................................................. 142
Export
I/Q data (remote) .................................................... 278
Softkey .................................................................... 144
export format .................................................................. 206
Exporting
I/Q data (remote) .................................................... 279
I/Q data format (remote) .......................................... 279
External
Softkey .................................................................... 129
Eye Diagram Frequency
Result type ................................................................ 84
Eye Diagram Imag (Q)
Result type ................................................................ 83
Eye Diagram Real (I)
Result type ................................................................ 82
F
Filters
Activating (remote control) ...................... 287, 292, 314
Alpha/BT (remote control) ...................................... 314
Customized ................................................................ 19
Selecting (remote control) ...................................... 314
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
Fine Synchronization .................................................... 177
Folders
New ........................................................................ 114
Free Run
Softkey .................................................................... 129
frequency
offset ........................................................................ 115
Frequency
Center ...................................................................... 115
RF Settings .............................................................. 154
Frequency Absolute
Result type ................................................................ 79
Frequency Error Absolute
Result type ................................................................ 92
Frequency Error Relative
Result type ................................................................ 93
Frequency Relative
Result type ................................................................ 80
Frequency response
EDGE filters ............................................................ 366
Low-ISI filters .......................................................... 368
Frequency shift keying (FSK) .......................................... 31
Frontend
Softkey .................................................................... 131
FSK Deviation Error
Compensation ........................................................ 174
Full Scale Level
Digital I/Q Interface (remote control) ...................... 274
Digital IQ .................................................................. 141
H
Hexadecimal
Softkey .................................................................... 119
Hysteresis
Lower (Auto level) .................................................... 122
Upper (Auto level) .................................................... 122
I
I/Q bandwidth .................................................................. 13
I/Q Capture
Capture Length ........................................................ 158
Capture Length (remote control) ............................ 300
Capture Length Auto .............................................. 157
Capture Oversampling ............................................ 158
Sample Rate ............................................................ 158
Softkey .................................................................... 131
Trigger Mode .......................................................... 159
Usable I/Q Bandwidth .............................................. 158
I/Q data
Block diagram ............................................................ 10
Export (remote control) .................................... 278, 279
Export format (remote control) ................................ 279
Import (remote control) ............................................ 278
Saving ...................................................................... 110
I/Q Imbalance
Compensation ........................................................ 174
I/Q Offset
Compensation ........................................................ 174
I/Q pattern search ............................................................ 51
IEC/IEEE bus
Command description .............................................. 208
IF Power
Softkey .................................................................... 129
IF WIDE OUTPUT
Connector ................................................................ 159
382
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Index
Importing
I/Q data (remote) .................................................... 278
Input Coupling
RF Settings .............................................................. 155
Input sample rate
Digital IQ .................................................................. 140
Intersymbol interference .................................................. 14
IQ Export
Softkey .................................................................... 144
ISI
Filter .......................................................................... 15
Intersymbol interference ............................................ 14
K
Known data
Creating files ............................................................ 200
File syntax .............................................................. 202
Recording tool ........................................................ 201
Known Data
Files ........................................................................ 199
Working with ............................................................ 199
L
Level Unit
Digital I/Q Interface (remote control) ...................... 275
Digital IQ .................................................................. 141
Limits
Configuring .............................................................. 204
Modulation Accuracy ...................................... 137, 204
Lines
Menu ........................................................................ 137
Load Standard
Softkey .................................................................... 113
Lower-case (commands) .............................................. 209
Lower Level Hysteresis
Softkey .................................................................... 122
Low-ISI filters
Frequency response ................................................ 368
M
Magnitude Absolute
Result type ................................................................ 75
Magnitude Error
Result type ................................................................ 91
Magnitude Relative
Result type ................................................................ 76
Mapping .................................................................. 21, 149
marker
peak ........................................................................ 136
Markers
Coupling .................................................................. 133
Coupling (remote control) ........................................ 238
Selecting ................................................................ 135
Settings .......................................................... 135, 136
Setting to Trace ...................................................... 135
Set to trace .............................................................. 134
Matched filter .................................................................. 14
Max Hold trace mode ............................................ 125, 205
maximum search ............................................................ 136
Max Peak
softkey .................................................................... 136
MEAS filter ...................................................................... 15
MEAS key ........................................................................ 72
Meas only if burst was found ........................................ 163
Measurement bandwidth .................................................. 14
Measurement filters ........................................................ 17
Deactivating (remote control) .................................. 292
Enabling .................................................................. 179
Predefined ................................................................ 18
Type ........................................................................ 179
User-defined .......................................................... 179
Measurement result display ............................................ 73
Menu
Lines ........................................................................ 137
Measurement .......................................................... 112
VSA ........................................................................ 112
Min Hold trace mode .............................................. 126, 205
minimum search ............................................................ 137
Minimum shift keying (MSK) ............................................ 33
ModAcc Limits
Softkey .................................................................... 137
Modulation
Errors, FSK ................................................................ 69
Mapping .................................................................. 149
Order ...................................................................... 147
Symbol Rate ............................................................ 149
Type ........................................................................ 147
Modulation Accuracy
Limits .............................................................. 137, 204
N
New Folder
Softkey .................................................................... 114
Normalization
Demodulation ........................................................ 175
O
Octal
Softkey .................................................................... 118
offset
frequency ................................................................ 115
Offset
EVM ........................................................................ 176
Pattern .................................................................... 152
QPSK ........................................................................ 29
Reference level ........................................................ 121
Result range .......................................................... 171
Trigger ............................................................ 130, 160
Online help
Working with ................................................................ 8
Options
B160 ........................................................................ 159
B160 (Bandwidth extension) ...................................... 13
Bandwidth extension .............................................. 159
FSV-B25 .......................................................... 119, 275
RF Preamplifier (B22) ...................................... 119, 155
Order
Demodulation (remote control) ........................ 297, 299
Demodulation (Remote control) .............................. 298
Oversampling
Statistics .................................................................. 184
Overwrite mode ...................................................... 125, 205
P
Patterns .......................................................................... 151
Adding to standard .................................................. 167
Assigning to standard (remote control) .................... 309
Comment, remote control ........................................ 306
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
383
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Index
Copying (remote control) ........................................ 307
Creating .................................................................. 167
Defining .................................................................. 169
Defining (remote control) ........................................ 307
Deleting .................................................................. 168
Deleting (remote control) ........................................ 308
Editing ...................................................................... 167
Enabling .......................................................... 165, 167
List .................................................................. 166, 167
Managing ................................................................ 196
Offset ...................................................................... 152
Offset (remote control) ............................................ 313
Removing from standard ........................................ 167
Removing from standard (remote control) .............. 310
Restoring ................................................................ 114
Selecting (remote control) .............................. 309, 310
Settings .................................................................... 166
Text, remote control ................................................ 311
Working with ............................................................ 194
Pattern Search
Activating (remote control) .............................. 305, 310
Auto configuration .................................................... 165
Enabling .................................................................. 165
I/Q Correlation Threshold ........................................ 165
PEAKSEARCH .............................................................. 136
Phase Error
Result type ................................................................ 92
Phase shift keying (PSK) ................................................ 21
Phase Unwrap
Result type ................................................................ 78
Phase Wrap
Result type ................................................................ 77
polarity
Preamplifier (B22) .................................................. 119, 155
pre-trigger .............................................................. 130, 160
Printing
Results .................................................................... 110
Screenshots ............................................................ 110
PSK mixed forms ............................................................ 28
R
R&S Digital I/Q Interface (B17) ...................... 143, 273, 280
R&S Support
softkey ............................................................ 142, 144
Ranges
Softkey .................................................................... 116
Softkey (statistic measurements) ............................ 117
Softkey (Symbol Table) .......................................... 118
Range Settings
Softkey .................................................................... 132
Real/Imag (I/Q)
Result type ................................................................ 81
Receive filter .................................................................... 15
Recording tool
Known data .............................................................. 201
Reference
Result range .......................................................... 171
Reference filter ................................................................ 15
Reference level
Offset ...................................................................... 121
Offset (RF Settings) ................................................ 155
Reference Level
Digital IQ .................................................................. 141
RF Settings ...................................................... 116, 154
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
Restore Factory Settings
Softkey .................................................................... 114
Restore Pattern Files
Softkey .................................................................... 114
Restore Standard Files
softkey .................................................................... 114
Result ranges
Alignment ................................................................ 171
Defining .................................................................. 186
Display .................................................................... 108
Length ...................................................................... 170
Offset ...................................................................... 171
Overlapping ............................................................ 347
Reference ................................................................ 171
Selecting .................................................................. 124
Results
Saving ...................................................................... 110
Result Summary
Result type ................................................................ 94
Result type ...................................................................... 74
Result types
Display Configuration ............................................ 181
Overview .................................................................. 75
Transformation ........................................................ 182
Result type transformation .............................................. 74
RF Attenuation
RF Settings .............................................................. 155
RF Preamplifier (B22) ............................................ 119, 155
RF Settings
Attenuation Mode .................................................... 155
EL Attenuation ........................................................ 156
Frequency ................................................................ 154
Input Coupling ........................................................ 155
Reference Level .............................................. 116, 154
Ref Level Offset ...................................................... 155
RF Attenuation ........................................................ 155
Rotating PSK .................................................................. 25
RRC filter ........................................................................ 14
RX Settings
softkey .................................................................... 141
S
Sample rate
Digital I/Q Interface (remote control) ...................... 275
Digital IQ .................................................................. 140
Save As Standard
Softkey .................................................................... 113
Saving
I/Q data .................................................................... 110
Results .................................................................... 110
Screenshots ............................................................ 110
scaling
x-axis ...................................................................... 190
y-axis .............................................................. 189, 190
SCPI
Conformity information ............................................ 208
Screens
Display Configuration ............................................ 180
Screenshots
Printing .................................................................... 110
search
minimum .................................................................. 137
peak ........................................................................ 136
Search
Direction .................................................................. 136
Direction (Real or Imag) .......................................... 136
384
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Index
Limits ...................................................................... 136
Tolerance (Burst Search) ........................................ 163
Settings Overview
softkey ............................................................ 113, 131
Signal Description
Continuous/Burst Signal .......................................... 151
Pattern .................................................................... 151
Softkey .................................................................... 131
Signal Mapping .............................................................. 149
Signal Source
I/Q Analyzer ............................................................ 140
Remote control ........................................................ 277
Softkey .................................................................... 140
softkey
All Marker Off .......................................................... 135
CF Stepsize (remote control) .................................. 316
Continue Single Sweep (remote control) ................ 269,
Continuous Sweep (remote control) ........................ 270
Cont Meas (remote control) .................................... 270
Default Settings (remote control) ............................ 254
Deviation Lin/Log (remote control) .......................... 267
El Atten Mode (Auto/Man) ...................................... 120
Export (remote control) ............................................ 279
Frequency Offset .................................................... 115
Grid Abs/Rel (remote control) .................................. 264
Left Limit (remote control) ........................................ 244
Limits On/Off (remote control) ................................ 244
Link Mkr1 and Delta1 .............................................. 134
Link Mrk1 and Delta1 (remote control) .................... 212
Manual (remote control) .......................................... 316
Marker 1 (remote control) ........................................ 215
Marker 1 to 4 (remote control) ................ 216, 217, 243
Marker 2 (remote control) ........................................ 215
Marker 3 (remote control) ........................................ 215
Marker 4 (remote control) ........................................ 215
Marker Norm/Delta .................................................. 133
Marker Norm/Delta (remote control) ........................ 215
Marker to Trace (remote control) ............................ 216
Meas Time Auto .............................................. 122, 284
Meas Time Manual .......................................... 122, 284
Min .......................................................................... 137
Min (remote control) ........................................ 215, 241
Next Min .................................................................. 137
Next Min (remote control) ........................ 214, 241, 242
Next Peak ................................................................ 136
Next Peak (remote control) ............ 213, 214, 215, 239,
Peak ........................................................................ 136
Peak (remote control) ...................................... 213, 240
R&S Support .................................................... 142, 144
Range Lin. Unit (remote control) ............................ 267
Range Linear % (remote control) ............................ 267
Range Log (remote control) ............................ 263, 267
Reference Position (remote control) ........................ 266
Ref Level Offset (remote control) ............................ 266
Ref Level Position (remote control) ........................ 266
Ref Value (remote control) ...................................... 266
Ref Value Position (remote control) ........................ 266
Right Limit (remote control) .................................... 245
Search Limits (remote control) ................................ 244
Search Lim Off (remote control) .............................. 244
Select 1/2/3/4 .......................................................... 135
Select 1 2 3 4 (remote control) ................................ 243
Settings .................................................................... 121
Single Meas (remote control) .................................. 270
Single Sweep (remote control) ................................ 270
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 (remote control) .......................... 260
Trace Mode (remote control) .................................. 264
Trg/Gate Polarity Pos/Neg (remote control) ............ 329
Trigger Holdoff (remote control) .............................. 329
Trigger Polarity ................................................ 130, 161
Use Zoom Limits (remote control) .......................... 245
y-Axis Max Value .................................................... 118
y-Axis Max Value (remote control) .......................... 255
y-Unit %/Abs (remote control) ................................ 254
Softkey
Auto Level ................................................................ 121
Average .......................................................... 126, 206
BB Power Retrigger Holdoff (remote control) ................
Blank ................................................................ 126, 206
Center ...................................................................... 115
Center (remote control) .......................................... 316
Clear Write ...................................................... 125, 205
Config ModAcc Limits .............................................. 137
Continue Single Sweep .......................................... 123
Continuous Sweep .................................................. 123
Continuous Sweep (remote control) ........................ 270
Cont Meas (remote control) .................................... 270
Decim Sep (remote control) .................................... 268
DigIConf .................................................................. 142
Display Config ................................................ 114, 132
EL Atten (remote control) ........................................ 276
EL Atten Mode (Auto/Man) (remote control) .......... 275,
El Atten On/Off ........................................................ 120
EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 141
Export (remote control) .................................... 278, 279
Frequency Offset (remote control) .......................... 317
IF Power Retrigger Holdoff (remote control) ............ 328
IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis (remote control) ............
Import (remote control) ............................................ 278
Input (AC/DC) .................................................. 121, 142
Input (AC/DC)(remote control) ................................ 272
IQ Export ................................................................ 144
Load Standard ........................................................ 113
Marker 1/2/3/4 ........................................................ 133
Marker 1 to 4 (remote control) ........................ 217, 246
Marker to Trace ...................................................... 134
Marker to Trace (remote control) ............................ 243
Max Hold ........................................................ 125, 205
Mech Atten Auto ...................................................... 120
Mech Atten Auto (remote control) ............................ 272
Mech Atten Manual .................................................. 119
Mech Atten Manual (remote control) ...................... 272
Min Hold .......................................................... 126, 205
ModAcc Limits ........................................................ 137
Preamp On/Off ................................................ 119, 155
Preamp On/Off (remote control) .............................. 277
Ref Level (remote control) ...................................... 265
Ref Level Offset ...................................................... 121
RF Atten Auto .......................................................... 120
RF Atten Auto (remote control) ................................ 272
RF Atten Manual ...................................................... 119
RF Atten Manual (remote control) .......................... 272
Select 1 2 3 4 (remote control) ................................ 246
Single Meas (remote control) .................................. 270
Single Sweep .......................................................... 123
Single Sweep (remote control) ................................ 270
385
R&S
®
FSV-K70
Index
Trace Mode (remote control) .................................. 260
Trg/Gate Source (remote control) ............ 327, 328, 329
Trigger Holdoff ........................................................ 161
Trigger Hysteresis .................................................. 161
Trigger Offset .................................................. 130, 160
View ................................................................ 126, 206
Softkeys
Lower Level Hysteresis .......................................... 122
Upper Level Hysteresis .......................................... 122
Source .............................................................................. 74
Special characters ........................................................ 210
Spectral display .............................................................. 102
Standard Defaults
softkey .................................................................... 114
Standards
Predefined ................................................................ 41
Saving ...................................................................... 113
Saving (remote control) .......................................... 313
Statistical display .......................................................... 105
Statistics count .............................................................. 123
Status registers
STATus:QUEStionable ............................................ 333
Status reporting system ................................................ 331
Swap I/Q ........................................................................ 159
Sweep
Continue single sweep ............................................ 123
Continuous .............................................................. 123
Single ...................................................................... 123
Switching on the option .................................................... 72
Symbol mapping .............................................................. 21
Symbol rate .................................................................... 149
Remote control ........................................................ 312
Symbols
Display Configuration ............................................ 181
Symbol tables
Result type ................................................................ 88
Syntax
Known data files ...................................................... 202
T
Trace
Clear Write ...................................................... 125, 205
Trace mode .................................................................... 127
Average .......................................................... 126, 206
Blank ................................................................ 126, 206
Clear Write ...................................................... 125, 205
Max Hold ........................................................ 125, 205
Min Hold .......................................................... 126, 205
View ................................................................ 126, 206
Traces
Configuring .............................................................. 128
Trace Wizard .................................................................. 127
Transmit filter .................................................................. 15
Alpha/BT .......................................................... 150, 179
Deactivating (remote control) .................................. 314
Predefined ................................................................ 16
Type ........................................................................ 149
User-defined .......................................................... 149
trigger
slope ................................................................ 130, 161
Trigger
Holdoff .................................................................... 161
Hysteresis ................................................................ 161
Level ................................................................ 130, 161
Offset .............................................................. 130, 160
Trigger Mode
I/Q Capture .............................................................. 159
Trigger Offset Unit
Softkey .................................................................... 130
TX Settings
EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 141
U
Units
Softkey .................................................................... 119
Upper-case (commands) .............................................. 209
Upper Level Hysteresis
Softkey .................................................................... 122
Useful length
Bursts ...................................................................... 151
Bursts (remote control) ............................................ 302
V
Vector I/Q
Result type ................................................................ 86
View trace mode .................................................... 126, 206
VSA menu .................................................................... 112
X
X-Axis Quantize
Softkey .................................................................... 117
X-Axis Range
Softkey ............................................................ 117, 191
X-Axis Reference Value
Softkey .................................................................... 117
X-Axis Unit
Softkey .................................................................... 119
Y
Y-Axis Autorange
Softkey ............................................ 117, 122, 190, 191
Y-Axis Auto Range All Screens
Softkey .................................................................... 122
Y-Axis Range
Softkey ............................................................ 116, 192
Y-Axis Reference Position
Softkey .................................................... 117, 189, 191
Y-Axis Reference Value
Softkey .................................................... 116, 189, 191
Y-Axis Unit
Softkey .................................................................... 119
Z
zoom
Zoom
Amplitude ........................................................ 126, 206
Operating Manual 1176.7578.02 ─ 01
386
advertisement
Key Features
- Vector measurement
- Scalar measurement
- Digitally modulated single-carrier signals
- RF signals to complex baseband conversion
- Digital Baseband interface
- I/Q signal analysis
